JVC GY DV550 User Manual
U
E
INTRODUCTION  
INTRODUCTION  
CONTROLS,  
INDICATORS AND  
CONNECTORS  
CONTROLS,  
INDICATORS AND  
CONNECTORS  
BASIC SYSTEM  
CONNECTIONS AND  
ADJUSTMENTS  
BASIC SYSTEM  
CONNECTIONS AND  
ADJUSTMENTS  
POWER SUPPLY  
PREPARATIONS  
POWER SUPPLY  
PREPARATIONS  
SETTING AND  
ADJUSTMENTS  
BEFORE SHOOTING  
SETTING AND  
ADJUSTMENTS  
BEFORE SHOOTING  
DV CAMCORDER  
DV CAMKORDER  
CAMESCOPE DV  
SHOOTING  
OPERATION  
SHOOTING  
OPERATION  
DV CAMCORDER  
PLAYBACK MODE  
PLAYBACK MODE  
INSTRUCTIONS  
INSTRUCTIONS  
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG  
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS  
GY-DV550  
TIME CODE  
OPERATION  
GY-DV550  
TIME CODE  
OPERATION  
S.S.F. (Super Scene  
Finder) FUNCTION  
S.S.F. (Super Scene  
Finder) FUNCTION  
USING EXTERNAL  
COMPONENTS  
USING EXTERNAL  
COMPONENTS  
SETUP MENU  
SETUP MENU  
FEATURES OF THE  
CAMERA SECTION  
FEATURES OF THE  
CAMERA SECTION  
OTHERS  
OTHERS  
* The illustration shows the GY-DV550 DV Camcorder with the optional lens viewfinder attached.  
* The illustration shows the GY-DV550 DV Camcorder with the optional lens viewfinder attached.  
Thank you for purchasing this JVC product. Before operating  
this unit, please read the instructions carefully to ensure the  
best possible performance.  
For Customer Use :  
Enter below the Serial No. which is located on the body.  
Retain this information for future reference.  
This instruction manual is made from 100% recycled paper.  
Thank you for purchasing this JVC product. Before operating  
this unit, please read the instructions carefully to ensure the  
best possible performance.  
This instruction manual is made from 100% recycled paper.  
SC961000 (E MODEL)  
Model No. GY-DV550  
Serial No.  
SC96999 (U MODEL)  
U
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS  
Thank you for purchasing the DV Camcorder GY-DV550.  
These instructions are for GY-DV550U.  
WARNING:  
FOR USA AND CANADA  
TO REDUCETHE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC  
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSETHIS APPLIANCETO  
CAUTION  
RAIN OR MOISTURE.  
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK  
DO NOT OPEN  
This unit should be used with 12V DC only.  
CAUTION:  
To prevent electric shocks and fire hazards, do NOT use  
any other power source.  
AUTION :  
TO REDUCETHE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,  
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).  
NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.  
●
●
This unit records and plays back in the SP mode.  
Recording or playback in the LP mode is not possible.  
Due to manufacturing dispersion of tapes, we  
recommend not to record pictures within the first 2 to 3  
minutes from the beginning of the tape.  
Before recording important scenes, be sure to perform a  
test recording and confirm that both video and audio are  
recorded correctly.  
Recorded video and audio contents are for private use.  
Other use may infringe on the rights of copyright holders.  
JVC cannot assume liabilities that may derive from the  
impossibility of normal recording or playback of video or  
audio due to malfunction of the camcorder or the  
videocassette.  
This unit is a MiniDV video system format camcorder.  
Videocassettes which are not marked with the MiniDV  
symbol cannot be used with this unit.  
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.  
NOTE:  
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an  
equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the  
presence of uninsulated“dangerous voltage”within the  
product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magni-  
tude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.  
The rating plate (serial number plate) is on the top frame.  
●
The following phenomena may occur when tapes recorded  
on other units (including another GY-DV550) are recorded  
or played back on this camcorder.  
CAUTION  
●
●
To prevent electric shock, do not open the cabinet. No user servicea-  
ble parts inside. Refer servicing to qualified service personnel.  
●
The transient section between scenes recorded on other  
units and those recorded on this unit may appear  
disturbed.  
Digital noise may appear during playback due to tracking  
errors.  
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is  
intended to alert the user to the presence of important  
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in  
the literature accompanying the appliance.  
●
AVERTISSEMENT :  
POUR EVITER LES RISQUES D’INCENDIE OU  
D’ELECTROCUTION, NE PAS EXPOSER  
L’APPAREIL A L’HUMIDITE OU A LA PLUIE.  
Ce magnétoscope ne doit être utilisé que sur du courant  
direct en 12V.  
MAIN FEATURES  
Compact, lightweight design  
Compact and light weight body was realized by use of mag-  
nesium die cast.  
DV high-quality digital format  
INFORMATION FOR USA  
●
●
ity picture  
INFORMATION  
Three 1/2" CCDs with 380,000 effective pixels employed.  
Digital signal processing for reproduction of high-quality pic-  
ture.  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits  
for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against  
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment  
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not  
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause  
harmfull interfrence to radio communications. However, there is no  
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.  
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or  
television reception, which can be determined by turning the  
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the  
interference by one or more of the following measures:  
●
●
Super sensitivity F/11, 2000 lux  
The 4:1:1 (U MODEL)/4:2:0 (E MODEL), 8-bit, 25 Mbps com-  
ponent digital processing of the format ensures recording  
and playback with high picture quality.  
High sound quality thanks to PCM audio  
Two types of sampling, 16-bit, 48 kHz sampling and 12-bit,  
32 kHz sampling, ensure high-quality digital audio.  
ATTENTION :  
Enables shooting at normal indoor illumination eliminating  
Afin d’eviter tout resque d’incendie ou d’électrocution,  
ne pas utillser d’autres sources d’alimentation électrique.  
the need for extra illumination.  
LOLUX for 0.75 lux (F1.4) illumination  
●
●
Employment of LOLUX mode ensures +33 dB gain. This is  
ideal for difficult shooting conditions with almost no illumina-  
tion.  
REMARQUE :  
La plaque d’identification (numéro de série) se trouve sur le panneau  
26-pin camera terminal  
●
Multi-Zone Auto Iris Detection Circuit  
arrière de l’appareil.  
The terminal can be used to connect an external VCR and  
camera remote control unit. The recording VCR can be se-  
lected in the VTR SELECT switch.  
Multi-zone auto iris detection circuit ensures optimum iris posi-  
tion even in backlit conditions or when a bright subject moves in  
a frame. Switch provided for selecting over or under level.  
Safety Zone indication in viewfinder  
● Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
(Main unit/parallel/external VCR)  
External video input capability  
External composite video can be recorded with this unit.  
● Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
● Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from  
that to which the receiver is connected.  
●
●
●
●
Two types of safety zone indicator functions provided.  
Center mark can be turned ON/OFF.  
Zebra pattern video level indication in viewfinder  
Select video level indicated by zebra pattern by means of  
menu setting.  
WARNING ON LITHIUM BATTERY  
Character mixing capability for monitor output  
Characters can be mixed for output to the MONITOR OUT  
connector using menu setting.  
Audio reference recording level selected  
The audio reference recording level can be set to -20dB or  
-12dB in the menu.  
Normal/LETTER (16:9) screen switching capability  
You can switch between 4:3 ratio screen and 16:9 ratio screen  
in the menu.  
● Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
The battery used in this device may present a fire or chemical burn  
hazard if mistreated.Do not recharge, disassemble, heat avobe 100°C  
(212°F) or incinerate.  
CAUTION  
CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT APPROVED BY JVC  
COULD VOID USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPERATE THE  
EQUIPMENT.  
●
●
●
●
Full Auto Shooting (FAS) function  
Replace battery with Matsushita Electric CR2032, use of another  
battery may present a risk of fire or explosion.  
• Dispose of used battery promptly.  
• Keep away from children.  
Eliminating the need for troublesome switch or filter opera-  
tions, the FAS function automatically provides a wide range  
of compatibility with shooting conditions which varies as you  
move between indoors and outdoors or between bright and  
dark locations.  
THIS DEVICE COMPLIESWITH PART 15 OFTHE FCC RULES.  
OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO  
CONDITIONS : (1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL  
INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY  
INTERFERENCE RECEIVED, INCLUDING INTERFERENCE  
THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION  
• Do not disassemble and do not dispose of in fire.  
●
●
Color temperature conversion filters for "3200K", "5600K +  
1/8ND", "5600 K + 1/64ND" provided.  
Variable scan shutter  
Eliminates flicker when shooting other screen pictures than  
NTSC, such as computer monitor screens.  
Copes with the range from 60.1 Hz to 2084.6 Hz.  
Concentrated LCD display (back-lit)  
The concentrated LCD panel shows the time code and CTL  
counter, tape remaining time, remaining battery power, au-  
dio levels, VCR section setup menus, hour meter data, and  
a variety of warning indications. The display is back-lit to fa-  
cilitate viewing in dark locations.  
●
DV (i. LINK) connector  
●
●
Time code reader/generator  
DV connector (4-pin) provided.Enables transfer of digital data  
to other equipment provided with DV connector, such as a  
non-linear editing controller.  
The built-in time code reader/generator can be used to record  
SMPTE (U MODEL)/EBU (E MODEL) time code and user's  
bits.  
INFORMATION (FOR CANADA)  
RENSEIGNEMENT (POUR CANADA)  
●
●
S.S.F. (Super Scene Finder) function  
Enables memorization of the start point and ending point of  
each scene or memorization of CUE points.  
Camera (Video) output, VCR playback output (composite/  
YC) possible  
GENLOCK input connector  
Equipped with remote control system compatible GENLOCK  
function with SC (Sub Carrier) lock.  
Time code input/output connectors for slave lock capability  
This unit can be slave-locked to an external time code gen-  
erator which is connected to the time code input.  
The data in the built-in time code generator is output from  
the time code output terminal.  
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian  
ICES-003.  
Cet appareil numérique de la Class B est conforme à la norme  
NMB-003 du Canada.  
●
●
●
Built-in monitor loudspeaker for audio checking  
The input audio can be monitored in recording or EE mode.  
The playback sound can be monitored in the playback mode.  
The loudspeaker also outputs an alarm tone in case an ab-  
normal condition occurs in the unit.  
●
●
Built-in color bar (SMPTE type) (U MODEL)  
Built-in colour bar (EBU type) (E MODEL)  
Superior operability with shutter speed and menus selected  
by dial.  
●
●
Rec check function for convenient recording review  
Camera section designed with 3-CCD system for high-qual-  
3U  
4
1. INTRODUCTION  
1-1 Main Unit Configuration  
CONTENTS  
11. USING EXTERNAL COMPONENTS  
11-1 Connecting a Video Component with DV Connector 70  
11-2 Connecting a PC ...................................................... 71  
The GY-DV550 configuration is as shown below.  
BASIC OPERATIONS  
INTRODUCTION  
MAIN FEATURES ............................................................... 4  
5. PREPARATIONS  
5-1 Turning the Power ON .............................................. 41  
5-2 Cassette Loading and Unloading ............................. 42  
5-3 Setting the Date and Time........................................ 43  
1. INTRODUCTION  
12. SETUP MENU  
1-1 Main Unit Configuration.............................................. 6  
1-2 Precautions for Proper Use ........................................ 7  
1-3 Routine and Periodical Maintenance ......................... 8  
1-4 Precautions for Use of Head Cleaning Tape .............. 8  
1-5 Videocassette to be Used .......................................... 9  
1-6 Battery Pack to be Used ............................................ 9  
1-7 Condensation ............................................................. 9  
1-8 Characteristic CCD Phenomena ................................ 9  
12-1 VCR Setup Menu ..................................................... 72  
• VCR Setup Menu Configuration............................. 72  
• Displaying and Setting VCR Setup Menus............. 73  
• VCR Setup Menu Contents.................................... 74  
12-2 Camera Menu Screen Flow ..................................... 76  
12-3 How to Select from the Camera Menu ..................... 77  
12-4 VF Display Screen ................................................... 78  
12-5 OPERATION Screen ................................................ 79  
12-6 PROCESS Screen ................................................... 80  
12-7 ADVANCED PROCESS Screen ............................... 81  
12-8 SKIN COLOR ADJUST Screen................................ 81  
12-9 FILE MANAGE Screen............................................. 82  
12-10 SETUP Screen ......................................................... 83  
12-11 TIME DATE Screen .................................................. 84  
12-12 Resetting of Camera Menu Setting Values .............. 85  
OPERATE/WARNING  
LIGHT  
MODE  
RM  
VTR  
ON  
RESET  
OFF  
MONITOR  
SELECT  
CH-1  
MIX  
CH-2  
INCOM  
MIC  
COUNTER  
CTL  
TC  
UB  
FILTER  
3200k  
5600k+1/8ND  
5600k+1/64ND  
CARBON  
DYNAMIC  
ALARM  
1
2
3
INCOM  
MIC  
ON  
6. SETTING AND ADJUSTMENTS BEFORE  
SHOOTING  
LEVEL  
SHUTTER STATUS  
MENU  
MONITOR  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
AUTO  
FRONT  
REAR  
MANUAL  
AUDIO SELECT  
AUDIO INPUT  
OFF  
AUDIO  
LEVEL  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CALL  
AUTO IRIS  
FULL AUTO BLACK  
LOLUX  
BACK  
NORMAL  
SPOT  
L
STRETCH  
RM  
OFF  
DC IN  
/BATT.  
NORMAL  
COMPRESS  
6-1 Camera Settings ...................................................... 44  
6-2 Screen Size (4:3/16:9 aspect ratio) Mode Selection..... 44  
6-3 Viewfinder Adjustment ............................................. 45  
6-4 External Monitor Adjustment .................................... 45  
6-5 Back Focus Adjustment............................................ 46  
6-6 White Balance Adjustment ....................................... 47  
• White Balance Adjustment ..................................... 47  
• Full-Time Auto White Balance (FAW)..................... 47  
6-7 Mixing Characters to MONITOR OUT ...................... 48  
6-8 Switch Settings of the VCR Section ......................... 49  
6-9 Audio Input Signal Selection .................................... 50  
6-10 Audio Input Level Adjustment................................... 51  
6-11 Monitoring Audio during Recording .......................... 52  
L
POWER  
NG  
OPERATE  
ON  
OFF  
2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS  
2-1 Front Section ............................................................ 10  
2-2 Right Side Section.................................................... 12  
2-3 Left Side Section ...................................................... 18  
2-4 Top Section .............................................................. 19  
2-5 Adapter Section........................................................ 20  
2-6 Rear Section ............................................................ 22  
2-7 Counter Display Contents ........................................ 24  
2-8 Lens (optional) ......................................................... 25  
2-9 1.5-Inch Viewfinder (optional)................................... 26  
2-10 Indications in Viewfinder........................................... 27  
• Warning LED Indicators Inside the Viewfinder ....... 27  
• Viewfinder Screen Display ..................................... 27  
Lithium battery  
13. FEATURES OF THE CAMERA SECTION  
Microphone  
13-1 Full-Time Auto White Balance (FAW) ....................... 86  
13-2 IRIS (Brightness) Adjustment ................................... 87  
• Adjustment of Lens Iris .......................................... 87  
7. SHOOTING OPERATION  
Head cleaning tape  
•
Zebra Pattern Display during Manual Adjustment ...... 87  
7-1 Basic Recording Operation ...................................... 53  
7-2 VCR Save Mode....................................................... 55  
7-3 If Unit is Left in Record-Pause (Standby) Mode ....... 55  
7-4 Checking Recorded Contents in Record-Pause Mode  
(Recording Check Function) .................................... 56  
7-5 Recording External Video Signals............................ 57  
7-6 Recording with an External VCR.............................. 58  
13-3 Shooting the Screen Image on a Computer Monitor 88  
13-4 Gain (Sensitivity) Adjustment ................................... 89  
• Gain Switching ....................................................... 89  
• Gain Boost under LOLUX Condition ...................... 89  
13-5 Switch Setup According to Illumination and Subject 90  
• Switch Functions.................................................... 90  
• Full Auto Shooting (FAS) Function......................... 90  
13-6 How to Use Skin Tone Detail .................................... 91  
13-7 Connecting the Local Remote Control Unit.............. 93  
13-8 Connecting the Camera Remote Control Unit.......... 94  
PREPARATIONS  
3. BASIC SYSTEM CONNECTIONS AND ADJUST-  
MENTS  
Tripod base  
8. PLAYBACK MODE  
3-1 Basic System ........................................................... 32  
3-2 Attaching the Zoom Lens (optional) ......................... 33  
3-3 Attaching the Viewfinder........................................... 33  
3-4 Attaching the Microphone (provided) ....................... 34  
3-5 Attaching the Microphone (optional) ........................ 34  
3-6 Attaching the Tripod Base (provided) ....................... 35  
3-7 Attaching the 4-inch Viewfinder (VF-P400) .............. 35  
3-8 Inserting and Replacing Backup Lithium Batteries .. 36  
8-1 Playback Procedure ................................................. 60  
8-2 Fast-Forward, Rewind .............................................. 61  
8-3 Search ...................................................................... 61  
CAUTION :  
●
●
The front base mount may be locked while the pin of the  
tripod base is not inserted into the hole on the rear base  
mount of the unit.Therefore, after mounting, make sure  
that these parts are engaged properly.  
When moving the GY-DV550 mounted on a tripod, any  
impact or vibration should be avoided as this may cause  
the unit to become detached and to drop from the tripod.  
Be sure to remove the unit from the tripod before  
transporting it.  
OTHERS  
APPLICATION  
14. OTHERS  
14-1 Troubleshooting ........................................................ 96  
• Alarm Indications ................................................... 96  
• Warnings in Viewfinder........................................... 98  
• Troubles with Error Code Outputs ........................ 100  
• Troubles without Error Code Outputs ................... 101  
14-2 Hour Meter Display ................................................ 102  
14-3 Specifications ......................................................... 103  
• Optional Accessories ........................................... 104  
• External Dimensions ............................................ 104  
9. TIME CODE OPERATION  
4. POWER SUPPLY  
9-1 Displaying Time Code .............................................. 62  
9-2 Presetting and Recording of Time Code .................. 62  
• Time Code Presetting Procedure........................... 63  
• Presetting User's Bit Data ...................................... 63  
9-3 Recording Time Codes by Slave-Locking the Built-in  
Time Code Generator with External TCG ..................... 64  
9-4 Recording Time Codes in Continuation of  
4-1 AC Operation ........................................................... 37  
4-2 Battery Pack Operation ............................................ 37  
• Attaching a Flat Shape Type Battery Pack ............. 38  
• Using an Anton-Bauer Battery Pack ...................... 39  
• Remaining Battery Power Display.......................... 40  
• Precautions for the Battery Pack ........................... 40  
Time Codes Recorded on Tape ............................... 65  
9-5 Reproducing Time Codes......................................... 65  
10. S.S.F. (Super Scene Finder) FUNCTION  
10-1 Explanation of the S.S.F. Function ........................... 66  
10-2 How to Use the S.S.F. Function................................ 67  
10-3 Deleting S.S.F. Data ................................................. 68  
10-4 Resetting S.S.F. Data ............................................... 68  
10-5 Writing S.S.F. Data to Tape....................................... 69  
10-6 Outputting S.S.F. Data .............................................. 69  
5
6
1. INTRODUCTION  
1. INTRODUCTION  
1-2 Precautions for Proper Use  
1-3 Routine and Periodical Maintenance  
The GY-DV550 incorporates precision mechanical parts, which will collect dirt, wear out and deteriorate as the unit is used. On the  
other hand, when the unit has been used for a long period in a normal environment, the heads, drums and tape transport mechanisms  
also collect dirt deposited on them. Furthermore, dust which penetrates the inside of theVCR section especially during outdoor use  
will promote the wear and deterioration of mechanical parts by causing poor contact between tape and heads or failing to maintain  
the video and audio quality at high levels.To prevent wear and deterioration, clean the mechanical parts using a head cleaning tape  
as routine maintenance. However, cleaning with a head cleaning tape alone is not enough for cleaning the entire tape transport  
mechanism, it is also recommended to apply periodical maintenance (inspection) to prevent troubles that may be caused by the  
sudden occurrence of failure. As the replacement, adjustment and servicing of parts require advanced skill and equipment, please  
consult the person in charge of professional video equipment at your nearest JVC-authorized service agent.  
●
●
Supply voltage  
●
●
Noise may appear in the viewfinder when switching between  
the playback picture and the EE picture.  
Make sure that the power is between 11 V and 15 V DC. If  
the power voltage is too low, abnormal color and increased  
noise may occur. Do not exceed 15 V DC in any case, or the  
unit could be damaged.  
Setup level  
The video signal of the unit's video output is provided with a  
setup level when shipped from the factory. To turn off setup,  
set SETUP in the Camera Setup screen to OFF.  
Allowable ambient temperature and humidity  
Be sure to use the unit within the allowable temperature range  
of 0°C to 40°C and a relative humidity of 30% to 80%. Using  
the unit at a temperature or humidity outside the allowable  
ranges could result not only in malfunction but the impact on  
the CCD elements could be serious as small white spots  
may be generated. When storing the GY-DV550 for a long  
time, the storage temperatures should be -20°C to 60°C.  
●
Use the unit in an upright position.  
If placed on its side, heat release efficiency will deteriorate,  
adversely affecting the tape transport. Depending on  
circumstances the tape may also be damaged.  
Head Cleaning  
Periodical Maintenance  
● To maintain beautiful pictures and sound, be sure to use a  
head cleaning tape to clean the head periodically. (Read the  
“Precautions for Use of Head Cleaning Tape” on page 8.) If  
head cleaning is not performed periodically, a type of mosaic  
noise called block noise may appear in the picture or sound  
may be interrupted.  
Contents : Check or replace the following mechanical parts  
according to the running time.  
●
●
Vibrations  
Colors may fail to appear during VCR playback in locations  
subjected to vibrations.  
Running Time  
500H  
1000 H  
1500H  
2000H  
Drum ass’y (including heads)  
Head cleaner  
Tape guides & rollers  
Rotary encoder  
Belts & gears  
⅜
ଁ
⅜
–
⅜
ⅷ
ଁ
ଁ
ⅷ
⅜
⅜
ଁ
ଁ
–
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
●
Strong electromagnetic waves or magnetism  
Precautions for transportation  
Do not drop or hit the unit against a hard object.  
Noise may appear in the picture or audio and/or the colors  
may be incorrect if the camera is used near a radio or  
television transmitting antenna, in places where strong  
magnetic fields are generated by transformers, motors, etc.,  
or near devices emitting radio waves, such as transceivers  
or cellular phones.  
●
●
Remove the videocassette before transporting the unit.  
ଁ
ଁ
Do not insert an object other than a videocassette in the  
cassette insertion slot. Be sure to close the cassette cover  
when the unit is not to be used for a long period  
Drive parts  
⅜
ଁ
⅜
: Clean, check and adjust.  
ଁ
ⅷ
: Clean and check. Replace as required.  
: Replace.  
●
●
Use of wireless microphone near the camera  
When a wireless microphone or wireless microphone tuner  
is used near the camera during recording, the tuner could  
pick up noise.  
●
Do not set the OPERATE switch to OFF or remove the power  
cable during recording or playback. Otherwise the tape may  
be damaged.  
Block Noise  
●
Use the provided head cleaning tape.Do not use head cleaning  
tapes other than specified. For instructions on how to use the  
head cleaning tape and precautions for its use, read the  
“Precautions for Use of Head Cleaning Tape” on page 8.  
• The maintenance contents vary depending on the operating  
environment and method. Therefore, the above data should  
be considered as a reference.  
●
●
●
The sensitivity level of the provided microphone is set lower  
than the reference input (- 60 dBs) setting.  
Avoid using or placing the unit in places;  
• subject to extreme heat or cold;  
• with excessive dirt or dust;  
• with high humidity or moisture;  
• subject to smoke or vapour such as near a cooking stove;  
• subject to strong vibrations or on an unstable surface.  
• also do not leave the unit for long hours in a parked car  
under direct sunlight or near room heating equipment.  
When the unit is not in use, be sure to set the POWER switch  
to OFF in order to reduce power consumption.  
● When dirt adheres to the heads of the GY-DV550, the  
following indications appear during playback and recording  
check using the RET button on the lens section.  
Time management  
The accumulated running time of the unit can be confirmed  
with the hour meter display (which shows the accumulated drum  
running time). For details, see "HOUR METER DISPLAY" on  
page 102.  
Cleaning the body:Wipe body with a dry, soft cloth.When it is  
extremely dirty, soak the cloth in a solution of neutral  
detergent, wring it out and then wipe.To prevent deformation  
of the body, etc. and to avoid operation hazards, do not allow  
volatile liquids such as benzine and thinner to touch the body,  
and do not wipe it with a cloth soaked in such a liquid.  
•
•
•
“RF” appears on the display panel.  
“HEAD CLOG” appears on the counter display.  
“VTR WARNING (HEAD)” appears in the viewfinder.  
● If this kind of indication appears, please stop the recording.  
Head cleaning is required. This indicator disappears when  
the OPERATE is turned OFF, or when the cleaning tape is  
For consultations related to the maintenance programming  
or cost, please contact the person in charge of professional  
video equipment at your nearest JVC-authorized service  
agent.  
●
●
Protect the unit from being splashed with water (especially  
when shooting in the rain).  
played back.  
●
●
The camera may be unstable in the period immediately after  
the power is turned on, but this is not a malfunction.  
Protect the unit from being wet when shooting on a beach.  
In addition, salt and sand may adhere to the camera body.  
Be sure to clean the camera after use.  
"RF" indicator  
OVER  
dB  
CH 1  
40 30  
20  
10  
0
If a tape containing recorded PAL signals is played back, the  
GY-DV550 automatically enters the STOP mode. If this  
happens, remove the videocassette so that the unit returns  
to its normal state.  
OVER  
RF  
CH 2  
32k  
48k  
SP  
●
●
Protect the unit against penetration of dust when using it in a  
place subject to sandy dust.  
AUD LOCK  
MENU  
Optical performance of lens  
●
When turning on the power with the tape inserted or after  
loading a tape, the built-in head cleaner will emit a sound  
while operating.However, this is not a malfunction of the unit.  
Due to the optical performance of the lens, color divergence  
phenomena (magnification chromatic aberration) may occur  
at the periphery of the image. This is not a camera  
malfunction.  
"HEAD CLOG" indicator  
1-4 Precautions for Use of Head Cleaning Tape  
Adhere to the following precautions when using the head cleaning tape.  
1. The tape runs for 10 seconds at a time in the PLAY mode. (The tape stops automatically and then the unit enters the SAVE  
MODE. However, the display back light is not turned off.) Press the PLAY button after the cleaning tape is fully loaded.  
2. Do not use the tape more than four times at the most for each cleaning.  
CAUTION :  
3. The cleaning tape can be used approximately 100 times.  
●
●
Do not point the lens or viewfinder directly at the sun or other strong light source.  
• Eye damage could result.  
• If the lens or viewfinder is left pointed at the sun, rays may collect inside the unit and cause damage or a fire.  
When carrying the camera, be sure to hold the carrying handle. Holding the lens or viewfinder may result in damage.  
I Use the following chart as a guide for periodical head cleaning.  
Operating  
environment  
Low temperature  
0˚C to 10˚C  
Room temperature  
10˚C to 35˚C  
High temperature  
35˚C to 40˚C  
Yardstick for use  
of cleaning tape  
1 to 2 times  
every 5 hours  
1 to 2 times  
every 20 to 30 hours  
1 to 2 times  
every 5 hours  
Note 1) When used in a low humidity environment (10% RH to 30% RH), head cleaning should be conducted at intervals half of those  
given in the above chart.  
Note 2) If an ME80 tape is used immediately after head cleaning, the VTR warning (head) indicator may remain on. In this case, let the  
tape run as the indicator will turn off after the tape has run for a while.  
Note 3) Use the cleaning tape in the room temperature (10˚C to 35˚C).  
Note 4) The cleaning tape case contains instructions for use of the cleaning tape. However, some of these instructions differ from the  
contents of this sheet. When using the cleaning tape, please follow the instructions of this sheet.  
For servicing  
See the service manual of the GY-DV500 (No. 60125) page 2-5,  
“2.4 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION OF MAJOR PARTS”.  
←
7
8
2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS  
1. INTRODUCTION  
1-5 Videocassette to be Used  
2-1 Front Section  
● Use JVC’s videocassette tapes marked with MiniDV for  
this unit.  
continue to use a dirty or damaged tape, as this will  
reduce the rotary head life.  
Please use DVM60 or DVM30 type videocassettes.  
● Videocassettes cannot be used upside down.  
● Avoid storing a videocassette with unevenly wound tape,  
as this may damage the tape. Rewind it to the beginning  
before placing a cassette into storage.  
● Store videocassettes in a place with little humidity and good  
ventilation where mould does not form.  
● After a videocassette tape has been used repeatedly,  
it becomes unable to maintain full performance due to  
an increase in noise caused by dropouts, etc. Do not  
● Videocassette tapes marked  
MiniDV are provided with a  
switch on the back for use in  
[LENS] Lens control connector  
Connect 12-pin lens control cable from lens.  
4
5
Switch  
preventing  
erasure.  
accidental  
[ZEBRA] Switch  
REC  
When this switch is ON, a zebra pattern is superimposed  
on the viewfinder areas having video levels with a luminance  
level of 70% to 80%.This pattern can be used as a reference  
for manual adjustment of the lens iris.  
When CHARACTER MIX of the Camera SETUP Menu  
screen is set to ON, the zebra pattern will also appear in  
the MONITOR OUT connector video.  
Zebra patterns are also displayed during color bar display.  
* The zebra patterns are not generated for the Y/C OUT  
output.  
q
w
● Slide the switch to SAVE to  
protect the required recording  
in the tape from being  
overwritten.  
● To record on the tape, slide the  
switch to REC.  
SAVE  
!
!
VF  
1-6 Battery Pack to be Used  
The GY-DV550 can use any of the following battery packs.  
* An Anton-Bauer battery pack cannot be connected directly  
to the camera.It is necessary to mount the optional battery  
holder.  
Battery holder: Anton-Bauer QRQ27  
For details on how to mount the battery holder, see page  
39.  
ꢀ See "Zebra Pattern Display during Manual Adjustment"  
on page 87.  
• The default value is 70% – 80%.The luminance level can  
be changed with the ZEBRA setting in the VF DISPLAY  
Menu screen.  
●
Flat shape type  
●
Anton-Bauer battery pack: Trimpack 13/14 Series  
Magnum 13/14 Series  
●
Compack 13/14 Series  
Propack 13/14 Series  
ZEBRA  
OFF  
SKIN  
AREA  
e
AUTO  
ꢀ See "ZEBRA" item on page 78.  
ON  
WHITE  
ACCU  
FOCUS  
While this switch is pressed to the SKIN AREA side, the  
color tone areas specified with the SKIN DTL ADJUST item  
on the ADVANCED PROCESS MENU are indicated in the  
viewfinder. The switch returns to the OFF position when  
released.  
o
i
u
To display the remaining battery power accurately, set the  
VCR Setup Menu item No.396 BATTERYTYPE according  
to the type of the battery pack in use. (See page 75)  
VTR  
AUDIO  
TAKE  
r
t
LEVEL CH-1  
10  
y
ꢀ See “How to Use Skin Tone Detail” on page 91.  
1-7 Condensation  
•
The Skin Tone Detail color tone areas are not indicated  
while theVTR playback picture is shown in the viewfinder.  
Viewfinder mount base, sliding securing ring  
Mount the viewfinder on the base and secure it using the  
sliding securing ring.  
1
●
●
If the unit has been cooled down in a cold place and is then  
carried to a warm place, the moisture contained in the warm  
air may adhere to the head drum or tape guides and be cooled  
into water droplets. This phenomenon is referred to as  
condensation (dewing). When this occurs, the head drum  
and tape guides are covered with droplets allowing the tape  
to be stuck to them, leading to tape damage.  
Do not leave the videocassette inserted when moving the camera  
under conditions where the temperature environment changes.  
[VTR]VTR trigger button (record start/stop button)  
Record start/stop can be effected with this button.  
(It is interlocked with the VTR trigger button on the lens  
section.)  
6
7
ꢀ See "Attaching the Viewfinder" on page 33.  
●
When condensation occurs in this unit, the DEW indicator on the  
display lights up, and the WARNING LED blinks red. (See page 96)  
To remedy, leave the unit with the power ON and wait until  
the WARNING LED stops blinking red and the DEW indicator  
disappears from the counter display.  
[VF] Viewfinder connector (6-pin)  
Connect the cable from the viewfinder here.  
2
3
[AUDIO LEVEL CH-1] CH-1 audio input level  
control  
Adjusts the audio input level of the CH1 audio signal.  
Normally, the camera is used with the control set to the  
maximum (10) position.  
Condensation occurs in the following cases:  
[AUDIO IN FRONT] Audio input front connector  
(XLR 3-pin)  
Audio input terminal for connecting camera microphone or  
external audio devices.  
•
•
•
When the unit is suddenly moved from a cold place to a  
warm place.  
When a room heater has just started or when the unit is  
exposed directly to cold air from an air conditioner.  
When the unit is placed in a very humid place.  
DEW  
indicator  
OPERATE/WARNING  
OVER  
dB  
OVER  
CH 1  
AUTO OFF DEW  
HOLD  
40 30  
20  
10  
0
CH 2  
•
To use this control, set the VCR Setup Menu item No.  
246 CH1 FRONT VR ENABLE to "ENABLE".  
•
Set AUDIO IN FRONT LINE/MIC switch 6 on page 23  
32k  
48k  
SP  
PB  
according to the connecting device.  
• When recording audio from this terminal, set CH-1 AUDIO  
INPUT switch 7 or CH-2 AUDIO INPUT switch 8 to  
FRONT.  
AUD LOCK  
MENU  
Note:  
Even when the VCR Setup Menu item No. 246 is set to  
DISABLE, the recording level changes slightly when this  
control is turned.  
ꢀ See page 14.  
1-8 Characteristic CCD Phenomena  
Smear and Blooming  
Moire or Aliasing  
Pin No.  
Function  
GND  
1
2
[AUTO WHITE/ACCU FOCUS] switch  
AUTO WHITE:  
8
Due to the physical structure of a CCD it is possible to induce  
vertical streaking (called "smear") when shooting an extremely  
bright light source.Another effect is the expansion of light around  
a bright light or object (called "blooming").  
The CCD employed in this unit is characterized by inducing  
very little smear or blooming. Nevertheless, please be careful  
when shooting a bright light source.  
Shooting stripes or fine patterns may cause a jagged effect or  
a banding in fine mesh patterns.  
1
2
3
3
HOT  
•
First, position a white object to occupy 80% of the centre  
of the image.  
COLD  
White dots  
•
Setting this switch to the upper position ("AUTO WHITE")  
will provide automatic adjustment for white balance.  
High temperatures can cause CCD sensor pixels to malfunction  
with the effect of white dots in the image. This condition is  
conspicuous especially when gain is applied.  
CAUTION:  
* It is not activated in preset, full auto shooting, full-time  
auto white balance and color bar modes.  
ꢀ See "White Balance Adjustment" on page 47.  
ACCU FOCUS:  
Smear  
(Vertical pale streaking  
appearing at high  
luminous object)  
The provided microphone is a phantom microphone.When  
using the provided microphone, set AUDIO IN FRONT  
LINE/MIC switch to MIC+48V ON.  
When using audio input device other than a phantom  
microphone, set AUDIO IN FRONT LINE/MIC switch to  
LINE or MIC before connecting the device.  
This is a characteristic of the charged-coupled device (CCD).  
As far as possible, use the unit under conditions where the  
temperature of the unit does not increase.  
•
When this switch is set to "ACCU FOCUS" in the lower  
position, the lens iris will be forced to open for  
approximately ten seconds.  
High luminous object  
(Electric light, sunlight, etc.)  
Blooming  
(Blurring in highlight)  
Monitor screen  
9
10  
2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS  
2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS  
2-1 Front Section (Cont’d)  
2-2 Right Side Section  
[Camera Setting Section]  
•
The depth of field can be reduced and the lens focusing  
OPERATE/WARNING  
can be adjusted more accurately.  
q
w
RESET  
MONITOR  
CAUTION:  
SELECT  
FILTER  
3200k  
5600k+1/8ND  
5600k+1/64ND  
CH-1  
e
ALARM  
MIX  
CH-2  
1
2
3
•
As the automatic shutter is activated here, flicker may  
appear on the screen depending on the lighting  
conditions (such as a fluorescent lamp, etc.)  
Colors may appear for white subjects.  
r
t
SHUTTER STATUS  
MENU  
MONITOR  
y
u
•
This operation is not possible in the LOLUX mode.  
AUDIO  
LEVEL  
CH-1  
CH-2  
AUTO IRIS  
FULL AUTO BLACK  
LOLUX  
BACK  
NORMAL  
SPOT  
L
STRETCH  
i
o
!
NORMAL  
COMPRESS  
L
[TAKE] button  
9
0
The Super Scene Finder (S.S.F.) function retains the time  
code data for IN point and OUT point or CUE point in the  
unit's memory.  
!
!
!
OPERATE  
NG  
ON  
OFF  
ꢀ See “S.S.F. Function” on page 66.  
Lens mounting ring/Lens lock lever  
Hold the lens and use the lever to turn the ring anticlockwise  
to release lens.  
!
To mount lens make sure the lens guide pin fits well, and  
then turn the ring clockwise until firm.  
ꢀ See "Attaching the Zoom Lens" on page 33.  
CAUTION:  
[ALARM] Volume control  
1
Due to the characteristics of the CCD, the screen will  
appear to be slightly colored when changing the shutter  
speed greatly.After changing the shutter speed, perform  
white balance again.  
White balance may not work properly for high-speed  
shutters.  
Turn to adjust the volume of the alarm tone that is output from  
the monitoring loudspeaker or earphone in case of a warning  
or other abnormal condition occurring with the GY-DV550.  
Turn this control anticlockwise to reduce the volume.Setting  
this control to the minimum position mutes the alarm tone.  
[FILTER] Color temperature conversion filter  
control knob  
!
This knob changes the internal color temperature filter.  
ꢀ See "Camera Settings" on page 44.  
[MONITOR] Audio monitor volume control  
Adjusts the volume of the monitoring loudspeaker and  
earphone. The audio is muted when this control is set to  
the minimum position.  
2
3
[LOLUX] LOLUX On/Off button  
This button toggles the LOLUX mode on and off.  
5
•
LOLUX gain gives extremely low light level sensitivity for  
special applications. This will result in an increase of 33  
dB (approximately 45 times) in the LOLUX mode.  
LOLUX operation takes priority over normal gain setting.  
If the unit is placed in the LOLUX mode when it is in full  
auto shooting mode, the auto level control (ALC) (one of  
the full auto shooting functions) will be made inactive, so  
that the LOLUX mode is given preference (FAW still  
remains active).  
[STATUS] Status/menu button  
•
•
•
Pressing this button in the normal screen mode (condition  
when menu is not shown) displays a status screen in the  
viewfinder.The displayed status mode changes each time  
the button is pressed.  
ꢀ See "Status Screens" on page 27.  
•
Pressing this button for more than 1 second in the normal  
screen mode displays the Camera Menu screen in the  
viewfinder. Pressing this button while the menu screen is  
displayed in the viewfinder makes the menu screen  
disappear.  
ꢀ See "GAIN BOOST UNDER LOLUX CONDITION" on  
page 89.  
[BLACK] Black stretch/black compression switch  
Switches the gain for the dark section of the image.  
Set to an appropriate position depending on the video signal  
to be shot.  
6
ꢀ See “How to Select from the Camera Menu” on page  
77.  
STRETCH  
: By stretching the signal only for the dark  
section, contrast in the dark portion of  
the image is enhanced.  
[SHUTTER/MENU] dial  
4
•
Pressing this dial once in the normal screen mode  
(condition when menu is not shown) displays the shutter  
speed for approximately 5 seconds. When this dial is  
turned upwards while the shutter speed is displayed, the  
shutter speed becomes slower.When turned downwards,  
the shutter speed becomes faster. The selected shutter  
speed is memorised for each file.To return the memorised  
shutter speed to the factory preset, press the dial one  
more time while the shutter speed is displayed.  
NORMAL  
COMPRESS  
: Standard mode.  
: When an entire image is relatively light  
and the contrast is low, the gain of the  
dark section is compressed to increase  
the contrast.  
[FULL AUTO] Full auto shooting ON/OFF button  
and indicator  
7
•
When this dial is turned upwards or downwards while the  
menu screen is displayed, the cursor (>) also moves  
upwards or downwards to allow selection of items in the  
menu. To change the setting value of the item, press this  
dial. When the setting value starts blinking, turn this dial  
upwards or downwards to change the setting.  
•
This switch toggles the full auto shooting function on and  
off.  
•
•
The indicator lights when in the full auto mode.  
Full auto shooting combines the auto iris, auto level control  
(ALC) to automatically adjust the video signal level and  
the white balance to their optimum levels.  
ꢀ See "How to Select from Camera Menu" on page 77.  
11  
12  
2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS  
2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS  
2-2 Right Side Section [Cont’d]  
2-2 Right Side Section (Cont'd)  
AUTO KNEE function  
•
The iris is placed in automatic mode even if the iris  
mode switch of the lens is in manual.  
The gain will vary continuously to the maximum of  
+12 dB. The shutter speed will vary continuously to  
the minimum of 1/240 (U MODEL)/1/200 (E MOD-  
EL) of a second.  
[VCR Setting Section]  
When shooting a foreground subject, such as a human  
being, etc., with a high-brightness background, if the  
brightness level is set for the foreground subject, the  
background image will be blurred with white.In such a case,  
a clearer background is obtained when the auto knee  
function is used.  
•
5
6
7
8
AUDIO  
LEVEL  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
AUTO  
FRONT  
REAR  
OPERATE/WARNING  
LIGHT  
ON  
OFF  
MANUAL  
ꢀ
See "Full Auto Shooting (FAS) function" on page 90.  
MODE  
RM  
VTR  
RESET  
It is effective especially in the following cases:  
AUDIO SELECT  
VTR SELECT TC GENE.  
AUDIO INPUT  
G
MONITOR  
INCOM  
MIC  
SELECT  
COUNTER  
CTL  
TC  
UB  
FILTER  
3200k  
CH-1  
•
•
•
When shooting a human being indoors with a view to the  
landscape out through a window.  
When shooting a human being in the shade on a fine  
day.  
CARBON  
DYNAMIC  
ALARM  
MIX  
CH-2  
1
2
3
SEE  
CONTINUE  
REC  
FREE  
MENU  
5600k+1/8ND  
5600k+1/64ND  
[AUTO IRIS] Auto iris level switch  
8
INSTR-  
UCTION  
MANUAL  
INT  
PRST  
INCOM  
PARA  
EXT  
MIC  
ON  
LEVEL  
SHUTTER STATUS  
MENU  
MONITOR  
REGEN  
This switch selects the automatic iris adjustment  
reference value according to the condition in which the  
camera is used.  
BACK L : Under back light (Opens the iris more than  
the standard level. The level of iris can be  
set in SPOT L/BACK L of the OPERATION  
MENU screen.) ꢀ See page 79  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
AUTO  
FRONT  
REAR  
LITHIUM BATT.  
MANUAL  
GROUP  
HOLD  
ITEM  
SHIFT  
SELECT  
ADVANCE PRESET  
DATA SET  
AUDIO SELECT  
AUDIO INPUT  
CAM AUX  
OFF  
AUDIO  
LEVEL  
CH-1  
CH-2  
AUTO IRIS  
FULL AUTO BLACK  
LOLUX  
BACK  
NORMAL  
SPOT  
L
STRETCH  
RM  
OFF  
DC IN  
/BATT.  
NORMAL  
COMPRESS  
L
When shooting a high-contrast scene.  
VTR INPUT  
POWER  
CAUTION:  
H 0  
9
B
C
D
E
NG  
OPERATE  
ON  
OFF  
If a fast moving high-brightness section like a car in  
sunlight is shot, the auto knee function may change  
the brightness of the entire image along with the motion  
of the object. In this case, set the auto knee function to  
OFF.  
F
A
NORMAL: Normal condition  
SPOT L : Under spotlight (Closes the iris more than  
the standard level. The level of iris can be  
set in SPOT L/BACK L of the OPERATION  
MENU screen.) ꢀ See page 79  
1
2 3  
[CH-1 AUDIO SELECT] selector switch  
[Audio setting]  
Monitoring loudspeaker  
5
[WHT.BAL] White balance switch  
Three white balance modes are selectable with this switch.  
@
This switch is used to select the method for adjusting the  
audio input level of the CH-1 audio channel.  
1
•
Enables EE monitoring of the input audio signal during  
recording, in the record-pause mode or in the stop mode.  
Outputs the playback sound in the playback mode.  
The sound to be output can be selected using the  
ꢀ See "SWITCH FUNCTIONS" on page 90.  
B
: If white balance is performed with the  
switch in this position, it will be  
memorised into B.  
The reference audio input level to the tape can be set using  
No. 257 AUDIO REF. SIGNAL LEVEL in the VCR Setup  
Menu screen (-20dB or -12dB). ꢀ See page 74  
[GAIN] switch  
9
Electronically boosts the light sensitivity when there is  
insufficient illumination on the subject. The boosting  
level differs depending on the switch position as follows:  
(Factory presets)  
A
: If white balance is performed with the  
switch in this position, it will be  
memorised into A.  
AUTO  
: The audio input level is held at the reference level  
even when sounds greater than the reference  
level are input.  
MONITOR SELECT switch  
.
4
•
The loudspeaker volume can be adjusted with the  
MONITOR volume control on page 12.  
The audio from the loudspeaker is not output when an  
earphone is plugged into the EARPHONE jack on page  
22.The warning alarm tones are also output through this  
loudspeaker.  
2
L
: 0 dB (no boosting is applied)  
PRST (PRESET) : A non-erasable white balance setting at  
The audio input level does not increase when  
the input level is low.  
M : 9 dB (boosted to approximately 3 times the original)  
3200K.  
2
H : 18 dB (boosted to approximately 8 times the original)  
•
FAW (Full-time Auto White) mode can be set to A, B or  
PRESET with the OPERATION MENU (see page 79).  
In the FAW mode, video color temperatures are constantly  
sampled for automatic adjustment to a proper white  
balance.  
MANUAL : The audio input level can be adjusted with the  
CH-1 AUDIO LEVEL control or the CH-1  
•
The boosting level for each switch position can be  
changed with the OPERATION menu screen.(ꢀ See  
page 79.)  
2
AUDIO LEVEL control on page 10.  
ꢀ See “ALARM INDICATIONS” on pages 96.  
[CH1 AUDIO LEVEL] CH1 audio input level control  
Adjust the audio input level of the CH1 audio channel with  
this control.  
7
To use the AUDIO LEVEL CH-1 audio input level  
control on the front section, set the VCR Setup  
Menu item No. 246 CH1 FRONTVR ENABLE to  
“ENABLE”.  
The more the boosting level is increased, the more the  
resulting image will be noisy.  
2
[NG] button  
#
$
[VTR SAVE/STBY] switch  
0
Pressing this button while recording or in the record-pause  
mode deletes the S.S.F. data stored in the memory of the  
GY-DV550 with the S.S.F. (Super Scene Finder) function.  
This function is only valid in the MARK mode.  
ꢀ See “S.S.F. (Super Scene Finder) FUNCTION” on page  
68.  
•
To use this control, set the CH1 AUDIO SELECT switch  
5 to “MANUAL”.  
Used to select the status of the GY-DV550 when the  
power is turned ON and a videocassette is loaded.  
STBY: The GY-DV550 is in the standby mode.  
When a recordable videocassette is loaded, the  
GY-DV550 enters the record-pause mode.  
SAVE: The GY-DV550 is in the save mode.  
•
[CH-2 AUDIO SELECT] selector switch  
6
This control works regardless of the setting of the VCR  
Setup Menu item No. 246 CH1 FRONT VR ENABLE.  
To use this control, set the AUDIO LEVEL CH-1 audio  
input level control (7 on page 10) on the front section to  
the maximum (10) position, or set the VCR Setup Menu  
item No. 246 CH1 FRONT VR ENABLE to “DISABLE”.  
This switch is used to select the method for adjusting the  
audio input level of the CH-2 audio channel.  
The reference audio input level to the tape can be set using  
No. 257 AUDIO REF. SIGNAL LEVEL in the VCR Setup  
Menu screen (-20dB or -12dB). ꢀ See page 74  
The status of the GY-DV550 is displayed on the Status  
screen 1 in the viewfinder.  
[OPERATE] switch  
Turn the power ON and OFF with this switch.  
AUTO  
: The audio input level is held at the reference level  
even when sounds greater than the reference  
level are input.  
[CH2 AUDIO LEVEL] CH2 audio input level control  
Adjust the audio input level of the CH2 audio channel with  
this control.  
3
4
•
When this switch set to ON while a videocassette is  
loaded, the GY-DV550 status differs depending on the  
setting of the VTR (SAVE/STBY) switch 0.  
[OUTPUT] Color bar/Camera/Auto knee switch  
!
This switch is used to select the output signal. When  
the video signal from the shooting camera is selected,  
the auto knee function is available.  
The audio input level does not increase when  
the input level is low.  
•
This control is valid only when the CH2 AUDIO SELECT  
switch is set to "MANUAL".  
MANUAL : The audio input level can be adjusted with the  
CH-2 AUDIO LEVEL control  
6
CAM. AUTO KNEE ON:  
.
[MONITOR SELECT] audio monitor selector switch  
This switch is used to select the monitor sound output from  
the monitoring loudspeaker 1 or via the EARPHONE jack  
2 on page 22.  
3
Outputs the video signal from the shooting  
camera. In this case mode, the auto knee  
function is available.  
[CH-1 AUDIO INPUT] selector switch  
This switch is used to select the input section of the CH1  
audio channel.  
FRONT : The sound from the AUDIO IN FRONT connector  
on the front side section is input.  
REAR : The sound from the AUDIO IN REAR connector  
on the rear side section is input.  
[CH-2 AUDIO INPUT] selector switch  
This switch is used to select the input section of the CH2  
audio channel.  
7
8
CAM. AUTO KNEE OFF:  
Outputs the video signal from the shooting  
camera. In this mode, the auto knee function is  
not available.  
CH-1 : The CH1 channel audio is output.  
MIX : CH1 and CH2 channel audio are output mixed.  
CH-2 : The CH2 channel audio is output.  
BARS. AUTO KNEE OFF:  
Outputs the color bar signal. In this mode, the  
auto knee function is not available. Set to this  
position when adjusting the video monitor or  
when recording the color bar signal.  
CAUTION:  
Make sure to move switches all the way. Do not leave a  
switch stopped in a midway position. Noise will be  
generated and operation irregularities will occur.  
•
When the AUTO KNEE function is OFF, the point  
where the KNEE function takes effect (knee point)  
can be set using KNEE POINT in PROCESS MENU  
screen. ꢀ See page 80  
FRONT : The sound from the AUDIO IN FRONT connector  
on the front side section is input.  
REAR : The sound from the AUDIO IN REAR connector  
on the rear side section is input.  
13  
14  
2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS  
2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS  
2-2 Right Side Section (Cont'd)  
2-2 Right Side Section (Cont'd)  
[VCR Display Section]  
[Video setting]  
$
%
[ADVANCE/SELECT] button  
•
During presetting of time code or user's bit, press to select  
the value of the digit to be set. Each press of the button  
increases the number by 1.  
9
[VTR INPUT] VTR input setting switch  
Select whether to record camera images or composite video  
from an external device connected to the GENLOCK/AUX  
IN connector 8 on page 18 with this unit.  
u
y
t
!
!
w q  
•
In setup menu mode, this button is used to select the  
value of a menu item.  
OVER  
dB  
OVER  
CH 1  
AUTO OFF DEW  
SERVO RF L i  
CAM: Camera images are recorded  
OPERATE/WARNING  
40 30  
20  
10  
0
LIGHT  
MODE  
RM  
VTR  
ON  
RESET  
CH 2  
OFF  
Synchronous signals can be inputted to the  
GENLOCK/AUX IN connector.  
Set the VCR Setup Menu item No. 126 INPUT  
e
r
MONITOR  
INCOM  
[PRESET/DATA SET] button  
SELECT  
COUNTER  
CTL  
TC  
UB  
FILTER  
3200k  
CH-1  
32k  
48k  
SP  
WIDE  
SLAVE  
PB  
NDF  
HOLD  
CA
DYNMIC  
ALARM  
MIX  
CH-2  
1
2
3
5600k+1/8ND  
5600k+1/64ND  
•
During presetting of time code or user's bit, press to save  
the set value in the preset memory.The set time code or  
user's bit will be preset in the time code generator.  
In setup menu mode, this button is used to confirm the  
menu item setting and save the data in the memory.  
AUD LOCK  
MENU  
INCOM  
i
o
MIC  
ON  
LEVEL  
SHUTTER STATUS  
MENU  
MONITOR  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
AUTO  
FRONT  
REAR  
H
M
S
F
MANUAL  
AUDIO SELECT  
AUDIO INPUT  
SELECT to CAMERA. ꢀ See page 74  
OFF  
E
BATT  
F
AUDIO  
LEVEL  
REMAIN  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CALL  
REV FWD  
AUTO IRIS  
FULL AUTO BLACK  
LOLUX  
AUX: Composite video signals from the GENLOCK/AUX  
IN connector are recorded. External video signals  
are also outputted to the viewfinder.  
BACK  
NORMAL  
SPOT  
L
STRETCH  
RM  
OFF  
DC IN  
/BATT.  
NORMAL  
COMPRESS  
H
M
L
•
POWER  
OPERATE  
! !  
!
!
!
!
NG  
ON  
OFF  
Set the VCR Setup Menu item No. 126 INPUT  
SELECT to CAMERA. ꢀ See page 74  
•
•
For details of the presetting of time code or user's  
bit, see page 63.  
For details on the setup menus, see page 73.  
Memo:  
•
•
Camera images are outputted to the VIDEO OUT  
connector on page 18 and VTR/RM multi-pin  
7
^
[CONTINUE] button  
connector on page 21, even with the AUX setting.  
8
CAUTION:  
[OPERATE/WARNING] indicator  
Normally lights green.  
Lights orange during the VTR SAVE (tape protect) mode.  
This indicator lights or blinks in red in the case of a warning  
condition related to the remaining tape time, remaining  
battery power or other abnormal condition in the unit.  
For details, see "ALARM INDICATIONS" on pages 96.  
1
If this button is pressed simultaneously with the LOG button  
8 on page 19 during the stop mode, the tape winds to the  
last S.S.F. data OUT point.  
When setting the VTR/RM switch on page 20 to RM,  
the GENLOCK/AUX IN connector will be used for  
synchronous signal input.  
When AUX is set, GENLOCK is not available for  
MONITOR OUT and Y/C OUT signals.  
Immediately after the power is switched ON, the level  
meters may fluctuate. This is not a malfunction.  
•
•
ꢀ See “About the Scene End Cue Up Function” on page  
69.  
SP indicator  
Indicates the tape speed in record mode.  
6
7
To input the image of the DV connector  
on page  
1
32k/48k sampling frequency indication  
Indicates whether audio recording or playback occurs with  
12-bit, 32 kHz sampling or 16-bit 48 kHz sampling.  
In the recording mode, the sampling frequency is set using  
the VCR Setup Menu item No. 245 SAMPLING RATE.  
In the playback mode, the indication conforms to the  
sampling rate of the recorded sound.  
22, set the VCR Setup Menu item No. 126 INPUT  
SELECT to IEEE 1394. ꢀ See page 74  
TIME CODE GENERATOR setting switches  
[RESET] button  
2
3
&
[TC GENE] time code generator setting switch  
Preset mode/regeneration mode setting switch for the time code  
generator.In addition the switch is used to select the time code  
run mode when in the preset mode. In the S.S.F. mode, time  
code generator will change to the regeneration mode.  
REC : Preset mode. Set to this position when newly  
presetting and recording the time code. The time  
code mode of the time code generator will be in  
the REC run mode (time code runs only during  
recording).  
This position allows you to record continuous time  
codes when recording scenes one after another.  
FREE : Preset mode. Set to this position when newly  
presetting and recording the time code. The time  
code mode of the time code generator will be in  
the FREE run mode (time code runs permanently).  
Select this setting when the unit should be slave-  
locked with an external time code generator.  
* If this position is used when recording scenes one after  
another, the time codes become discontinuous at the  
change points between scenes.  
•
Press to reset the CTL counter value.  
•
* Pressing the button during presetting of time code or  
user's bit resets the time code or user's bit data to  
"00:00:00:00".  
0
[VTR SELECT] VTR setting switch  
Select whether to use this unit or an externalVCR connected  
to theVTR/RM multi-pin connector of page 21 for recording.  
This switch is enabled only when [VTR INPUT] switch 9 is  
set to CAM.  
[LIGHT] switch  
[AUD LOCK] indicator  
Indicates whether the audio signal is locked to the video  
signal during recording and playback.  
8
9
0
Turns the illumination of the back-lit display ON or OFF.  
ON : The display is illuminated.  
OFF : The display is not illuminated.  
(Keep this switch at OFF during battery operation of the  
GY-DV550 or when it is required to reduce the power  
consumption for some reason.)  
INT: This unit is used to record.  
PARA:This unit and external VCR are used to record.  
EXIT: Only the external VCR is used to record. Recording  
on the external VCR can be started and stopped by  
using the VCR start button on this unit.  
[MENU] indicator  
Appears when the MENU button on page 15 is pressed  
to select the VCR Setup Menu.  
1
WIDE indicator  
[COUNTER] switch  
4
•
During IEEE1394 input, the unit will display the “WIDE”  
indicator if the inputted data is of 16:9 aspect ratio.  
During playback and in the search modes, the “WIDE”  
indicator is displayed if the recording was made in the  
WIDE mode. The indicator remains off if the recording  
was made in the NORMAL or LETTER mode.  
Selects the contents displayed on the LCD counter display.  
The displayed contents when TC or UB is set can be  
selected using theVCR Setup Menu item No. 516 DISPLAY  
SELECT.  
CTL : Set to this position to display the CTL counter.  
TC : Set to this position to display time codes or for  
presetting the time code. (When the Menu item No.  
516 DISPLAY SELECT is set to “TC”)  
Time (Hour, Min., Sec.) is displayed. (When the Menu  
item No. 516 DISPLAY SELECT is set to “CLOCK”)  
UB : Set to this position to display the user's bits of time  
codes or presetting the user's bit. (When the Menu  
item No. 516 DISPLAY SELECT is set to “TC”)  
Date (Day, month, year) is displayed.(When the Menu  
item No. 516 DISPLAY SELECT is set to “CLOCK”)  
ꢀ See “VCR Setup Menu Contents” on page 75.  
[VCR menu/Time date setting]  
•
!
[MENU] button  
Press this button to enter the VCR setup menu mode.  
When the VCR setup menu mode is engaged, the "MENU"  
indicator in the LCD display lights and the counter display  
and viewfinder display are changed to the menu indication.  
In theVCR setup menu mode, pressing this button resumes  
the normal mode.  
Cassette indicator  
!
@
Lights when the unit is loaded with a  
videocassette. Blinks during ejection or tape  
loading.  
REGEN : Regeneration mode, in which the unit reads  
existing time codes on the tape and records time  
codes in continuation of the existing ones.Set to  
this position when you want to add additional time  
codes to time codes already recorded on the  
tape.  
@
[HOLD/GROUP] button  
[REMAIN] indicator  
•
Press this button when presetting the time code or user's  
bit. The presently displayed data is held (the "HOLD"  
indicator lights on the display) and the leftmost digit of  
the counter blinks. Pressing this button during presetting  
of time code or user's bit cancels the operation and recalls  
the previous display contents.  
The remaining tape time (minutes and seconds) is shown.  
For details, see page “Remaining Tape Time Display” on  
page 24.  
*
Lithium Battery Installation Compartment  
Audio level meters  
Show the audio input level of the CH-1 and CH-2 channels  
in the record mode or EE mode.  
In the playback mode, the meters show the playback audio  
level.  
"OVER" lights in case of excessive input.  
The reference recording level to the tape can be set using  
No. 257 AUDIO REF. SIGNAL LEV in the VCR Setup Menu  
screen (-20dB or -12dB). ꢀ See page 74  
5
Install a lithium battery (CR2032) in this compartment.The  
battery is used for the backup of the time code and time  
date.The GY-DV550 delivered without the battery installed.  
The provided lithium battery is for test use. It is  
recommended to install a new lithium battery.A new lithium  
battery can power the backup for about one year.See "How  
to Replace Backup Lithium Batteries" on page 36.  
•
In setup menu mode, this button is used to select the  
menu group.  
#
[SHIFT/ITEM] button  
•
During presetting of time code or user's bit, press this  
button to select the digit to be set.Each press of the button  
shifts the digit to be set (which blinks) to the right.  
In setup menu mode, this button is used to select the  
menu item.  
•
15  
16  
For servicing  
←
The protocol of VCR control is not printed in this service manual.  
2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS  
2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS  
2-2 Right Side Section (Cont'd)  
2-3 Left Side Section  
PUSH  
Warning indicators  
Tape transport direction indicators  
&
#
Ⅲ [AUTO OFF] indicator  
One of the indicators lights according to the  
tape transport direction.  
is displayed in the record-pause  
mode and in the still picture mode.  
REV FWD  
Lights when a non-recoverable error (e.g. tape winding  
error, drum stopped, etc.) occurs with the unit. This  
indicator also lights if condensation occurs.  
ꢀ See "TROUBLES WITH ERROR CODE OUTPUTS"  
on page 100.  
!
0
q
DV CAMCORDER  
GY-DV550  
VTR/RM  
Remaining Battery Power Display  
The 7-dot segment bar display shows the remaining battery  
power.  
* To display the remaining battery power accurately, set  
the VCR Setup Menu item No. 396 BATTERY TYPE  
according to the type of the battery pack in use.  
ꢀ See "Remaining Battery Power Display" on page 24.  
$
o
i
u
Ⅲ [DEW] indicator  
Lights when condensation (dewing) occurs on the drum  
or other mechanism in the unit.  
The unit rejects all operations while this indicator is lit.  
When the condensation has disappeared, the indicator  
turns off and the unit accepts operations again.  
w
e
PROMPTER  
OUTPUT  
GENLOCK/AUX IN  
VIDEO OUT  
CLH-I1NE OUT  
CH-2  
Y/C OUT MONITOR OUT  
REMOTE  
AUDIO IN  
FRONT  
TC IN  
TC OUT  
LENS  
r
t
y
Counter display  
Ⅲ [SERVO] indicator  
•
Whether to output signals with setup can be selected in  
SETUP of the Camera Setup screen. ꢀ See page 83  
(U MODEL)  
%
Lights in the case of trouble with the drum servo during  
recording to indicate that normal recording is not being  
accomplished.  
• Usually, this section shows the data of the CTL counter,  
time code or user's bit.The display mode can be selected  
with the 4 COUNTER switch.  
• Displays the VCR setup menu data when the GY-DV550  
is in the VCR setup menu mode by pressing the MENU  
button ! on page 15. The VCR setup menu includes the  
hour meter (accumulated drum operating time).  
• This section shows an error code when an abnormal  
condition occurs with the unit.  
Cassette cover  
1
Pressing the EJECT switch on top of the section opens this  
cover so that a videocassette can be inserted or removed  
from the unit. The cover can be locked automatically by  
pushing and closing it.  
If the cassette cover is not closed, the GY-DV550 will  
remain inoperative.  
[GENLOCK/AUX IN] Generationlock/Aux signal in-  
put connector  
Synchronous signals (black burst signals) are inputted when  
the GY-DV550’s camera image is synchronized with an ex-  
ternal component. Composite video signals are inputted  
when recording video signals from an external device with  
this unit. Which video signals to input can be selected us-  
ing the VTR INPUT switch on page 15.  
8
Ⅲ [RF] indicator  
Lights when the video head is clogged. Head clogging is  
detected during playback and recording check using the  
RET button on the lens section.Note that it is not detected  
during recording.  
•
Memo:  
To prevent penetration of foreign objects into the unit,  
do not leave the unit with the cassette cover open.  
* Should this indicator light up, clean the head using the  
provided head cleaning tape. For instructions on head  
cleaning tape, read “Precautions for Use of Head  
Cleaning Tape” on page 8.  
ꢀ See "Counter Display Contents" on page 24.  
ꢀ See "TROUBLES WITH ERROR CODE OUTPUTS"  
on page 100.  
Memo:  
[MONITOR OUT] monitor output connector (BNC)  
2
•
•
Video signals from this connector are not outputted to  
Connector for composite video signal output.  
The following video signals are outputted.  
the VTR/RM multi-pin connector on page 21.  
8
•
•
•
E-E video or playback video of VCR  
Screen mixed with characters.  
When the camera remote control unit is connected  
Section for time code related indications  
Ⅲ [SLAVE] Slave lock indicator  
This is the slave lock indicator which lights when the built-  
in time code generator is slave-locked (synchronized) with  
the LTC time code signal input at the TC IN connector.  
For the slave lock of the time code, see page 64.  
Ⅲ [PB] Time code playback indicator  
^
with setting the MODE switch  
on page 20 to RM,  
6
External video signal (When VTR INPUT switch is set to AUX)  
this connector will be used for synchronous signal input  
regardless of the VTR INPUT switch setting.  
The camera cannot be synchronized with a VCR  
playback signal.  
When the power is switched ON while an external sync  
signal is input, the screen moves in a vertical direction  
for a few seconds. this is not a malfunction.  
If the external sync signal is disrupted during recording,  
the “SYnc inh” (SYNC INHIBIT) indicator is displayed  
on the counter display and recording stops.  
If the external sync signal is disrupted during playback,  
playback of the disturbed video image continues.  
Start playback again after synchronization is obtained  
and the signal is stabilized.  
Ⅲ [Li] Lithium indicator  
Select whether to output the E-E video/playback video of  
VCR or character-mixed screen by CHARACTER MIX of  
the Camera Setup screen. ꢀ See page 83  
Lights and indicates the necessity of replacement when  
the lithium battery that backs up data of the built-in time  
code generator is nearly exhausted.ꢀ See "Inserting and  
Replacing Backup Lithium Batteries" on page 36.  
•
•
Memo:  
•
Select whether to output signals that include setup in  
the E-E video in SETUP of the Camera Setup screen.  
ꢀ See page 83  
* Setup is not included during E-E of IEEE1394.  
(U MODEL)  
VITC time code is not outputted from this connector.  
Lights when the time code is in playback mode.  
•
•
Ⅲ [NDF] Non-drop frame indicator (U MODEL)  
Lights when the internal time code generator or the  
playback time code framing mode is non-drop frame.“DF”  
is displayed in the drop-frame mode.  
•
[Y/C OUT] connector (4P)  
Separate YC video signal output connector.  
[TC IN] connector (BNC)  
3
4
• It never lights when the CTL counter is displayed.  
•
•
The screen will distort when inputting sync signals to  
both the main unit and camera remote control unit.  
This external video signal input (AUX IN) connector is  
an auxiliary connector.The bandwidth ofY signals will  
be 6.75 MHz (8 bit) regardless of the inputted signal  
bandwidth.  
Ⅲ [HOLD] indicator  
Input connector for the SMPTE-standard LTC signal. The built-in  
time code generator can be slave-locked with the input time codes.  
If the user’s bits should also be slave-locked, set theVCR Setup  
Menu item No. 403 U-BIT SLAVE to “TC&UB”.  
When the TC GENE switch (& on page 15) is set to REC or  
REGEN, or the VCR Setup Menu item No. 398 SSF MODE is set  
to“CUE MODE”or“MARK MODE”, slave-locking will not take place.  
For the slave lock of time code, see page 64.  
Lights when the time code generator display is held by  
pressing the HOLD button in the time code setting block.  
The time code or user's bit can be preset while this  
indicator is lit.  
*
ꢀ See “Displaying Time Code” on page 62.  
[REMOTE] connector  
9
A part of the unit's functions can be controlled externally.  
For connecting the local remote control unit (RM-LP55/RM-  
LP-57), nonlinear editing device, etc.  
TC OUT connector (BNC)  
5
6
Output connector for the LTC signal from the built-in time  
code generator.  
The time code recorded on the tape is not output in play mode.  
•
When connecting the local remote control unit, Set VTR  
Setup menu No. 050 REMOTE SELECT to LOCAL or  
IEEE1394.  
When connecting a nonlinear editing device, set to  
IEEE1394+RS232C.  
For details, please consult your JVC dealer.  
[LINE OUT CH-1/CH-2] connector (RCA)  
•
Output connector for audio signals.  
•
Outputs the input audio signal in the record and stop  
modes.  
Outputs the playback audio signal in the playback mode.  
Alarm sound is not output.  
Note:  
•
•
If you make an error in the setting, disconnect the  
connector cable before performing setting again.  
[VIDEO OUT] Video output connector (BNC)  
7
Connector for composite video signal output.  
Microphone attachment holes  
For attaching the microphone holder KA-A50 (optional).  
ꢀ See "Attaching the Microphone (optional)" on page 34.  
0
Camera images are constantly outputted as through images.  
Camera images are outputted even during external video sig-  
nal input (when VTR INPUT switch  
AUX).  
on page 15 is set to  
9
17  
18  
2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS  
2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS  
2-4 Top Section  
2-5 Adapter Section  
q
w
u
y
PUSH OPEN  
OPERATE/WARNING  
LIGHT  
MODE  
RM  
VTR  
ON  
RESET  
OFF  
MONITOR  
INCOM  
MIC  
SELECT  
CH-1  
MIX  
COUNTER  
CTL  
TC  
UB  
EJECT  
FILTER  
3200k  
5600k+1/8ND  
5600k+1/64ND  
CARBON  
DYNAMIC  
ALARM  
1
2
3
CH-2  
t
e
r
INCOM  
MIC  
ON  
LEVEL  
SHUTTER STATUS  
MENU  
MONITOR  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
AUTO  
FRONT  
REAR  
MANUAL  
w
AUDIO SELECT  
AUDIO INPUT  
OFF  
LOG  
REW  
STOP  
FF  
PLAY  
STILL  
AUDIO  
LEVEL  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CALL  
w
q
AUTO IRIS  
FULL AUTO BLACK  
LOLUX  
BACK  
NORMAL  
SPOT  
L
STRETCH  
RM  
OFF  
DC IN  
/BATT.  
NORMAL  
COMPRESS  
L
POWER  
NG  
OPERATE  
ON  
OFF  
i
y
r
u
e
t
[REW] button  
Press to rewind the tape.  
6
7
8
[EJECT] switch  
1
Slide to the side when inserting or ejecting the videocassette.  
Sliding this switch opens the cassette cover. If the switch is  
moved while the power is off, the cassette cover opens but  
it is not possible to insert or eject the cassette.  
•
Pressing the button in stop or fast forward mode initiates  
the rewind mode. The LED indicator above the REW  
button lights in this mode.  
CARBON : Use this setting when using a carbon-type  
microphone.  
DYNAMIC : Use this setting when using a dynamic-type  
microphone.  
[POWER] power source setting switch  
1
The power source to this unit is selected using this switch.  
When turning on the power, set this switch first.  
DC IN/BATT: Use this setting when supplying power from  
the DC INPUT connector of this unit or from  
the battery.  
•
Pressing the button during playback, still or forward search  
initiates reverse search at about 10 times the normal play  
speed. The LED indicators above the PLAY and REW  
buttons light during reverse search.  
Operation cover  
Open this cover when operating in the playback mode.  
Otherwise, keep this cover closed.  
2
3
[MODE] setting switch  
This switch is used to select the usage mode of the VTR/  
RM multi-pin connector.  
RM : This setting is used when connecting with the  
camera control unit.  
VTR : This setting is used when connecting and recording  
using an external VCR  
6
7
[FF] button  
Press to fast forward tape.  
OFF  
: Use this setting when not supplying power to  
this unit.  
[PLAY] button  
Press to start playback. In play mode, the unit outputs the  
video and audio signals of normal playback and the LED  
indicator above the PLAY button lights.  
* If the auto tracking is active at the moment the play mode  
is entered, the playback video will be interfered with digital  
noise.  
•
Pressing the button in stop or rewind mode initiates fast  
forward mode. The LED indicator above the FF button  
lights in this mode.  
RM  
: Use this setting when supplying power from  
the camera control unit through the VTR/RM  
multi-pin connector  
.
8
•
Pressing the button during playback, still or reverse search  
initiates forward search at about 10 times the normal play  
speed. The LED indicators above the PLAY and FF  
buttons light during forward search.  
CAUTION:  
BACK Tally lamp  
When connecting an external VCR, set this switch to  
DC IN/BATT and supply power from the DC INPUT  
connector or the battery of this unit.  
This lamp lights when the unit is in the recording mode.The  
lamp flashes when the unit is shifting to the recording mode.  
The lamp status and the lighting method can be selected in  
No.082 BACK TALLY MODE of the VCR Setup menu.  
ꢀ See page 74, “BACK TALLY MODE”  
[STOP] button  
4
[LOG] button  
Press to enter stop mode. The drum keeps rotating in stop  
mode. However, when stop mode has continued for about  
30 minutes, the unit enters the tape protect mode, in which  
the drum stops rotation and the tape tensioner is released.  
It takes more time than usual to enter the record or play  
mode from the tape protect mode.  
* The time until the tape protect mode is initiated can be  
set to 3 or 30 minutes with the VCR Setup Menu item No.  
307 LONG PAUSE TIME. When used in  
•
When the REW button is pressed while this button is kept  
pressed, the S.S.F. data stored in the unit’s memory are  
written to the tape. The LED indicator above the LOG  
button lights while S.S.F. data is being written to the tape.  
When the CONTINUE button (F on page 15) is pressed  
while this button is kept pressed in the stop mode, the tape  
winds to the S.S.F. data’s last OUT point, after which the  
unit enters the record-pause mode. (Scene End Cue Up)  
The FF button’s LED blinks during Scene End Cue Up.  
ꢀ See "Writing S.S.F. Data to Tape" on page 69.  
[CALL] button  
This button is pressed when sending call signals to a camera  
control unit operator without using the intercom headset.  
When this button is held down, BACK TALLY lamp blinks  
and call signals are sent to the camera control unit. When  
releasing this button, the unit stops sending the call signals  
2
3
The lamp blinks when the camera control unit is connected  
and while CALL button is held down. The lamp turns off  
2
•
when the CALL button is released.The lamp flashes when  
a call signal is received from a camera control unit operator.  
For details on the tally lamp display when connecting the  
camera remote control unit, ꢀ See page 95.  
7
a
cold  
and BACK TALLY lamp turns off.  
7
environment, the setting will be 3 minutes regardless of  
the setting on the VCR Setup Menu. ꢀ See page 75.  
[INCOM MIC] intercom microphone ON/OFF switch  
CAUTION:  
Microphone ON/OFF switch for the intercom headset.  
Set the switch to OFF when not using the microphone of  
the headset.  
[STILL] button  
Press to enter the still picture mode during playback or in  
the search or stop mode.  
When the still picture mode has continued for about 30  
minutes, the unit automatically switches to the stop mode.  
(Tape protect mode)  
* The time until the tape protect mode is initiated can be  
set to 3 minutes or 30 minutes with the VCR Setup Menu  
item No. 307 LONG PAUSE TIME.  
5
•
•
Only the EJECT switch and STOP button work during  
recording.  
If the cassette cover is open, all operations are  
rejected.  
[INTERCOM LEVEL] intercom receiver volume  
Knob for controlling the intercom headset receiver volume.  
4
5
[INCOM MIC] intercom microphone setting switch  
This switch is used to select the microphone type of the  
intercom headset.  
When used in a cold environment, the setting will be 3  
minutes regardless of the setting on theVCR Setup Menu.  
19  
20  
2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS  
2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS  
2-5 Adapter Section (continued)  
2-6 Rear Section  
!
PUSH  
PUSH  
7
o
DV CAMCORDER  
GY-DV550  
VTR/RM  
VTR/RM  
8
9
PROMPTER  
OUTPUT  
GENLOCK/AUX IN  
VIDEO OUT  
CLH-I1NE OUT  
CH-2  
Y/C OUT MONITOR OUT  
REMOTE  
AUDIO IN  
FRONT  
PROMPTER  
OUTPUT  
t
y
TC IN  
TC OUT  
LENS  
Y/C OUT MO
!
INTERCOM  
DV LINE  
MIC  
+48V  
ON  
LINE  
MIC  
+48V  
ON  
q
w
F
DC INPUT  
EARPHONE  
TC IN  
AUDIO IN  
DC  
OUTPUT  
e
[VTR/RM] VTR/RM multi-pin connector (26P)  
8
This connector is used to connect an external VCR or  
camera control unit. Camera image signals are outputted  
from this connector.  
r
u
i
Set MODE switch 6 according to the connecting device.  
Memo:  
•
•
•
Camera images of this unit are recorded on the  
externalVCR.Compost video signals from GENLOCK/  
AUX IN connector 8 on page 18 are not recorded.  
When recording on an external VCR, set the VTR  
INPUT switch 9 on page 15 to CAM and set the VTR  
SELECT switch = to PARA or EXT.  
Bottom side  
[AUDIO IN REAR] audio input rear connector (XLR  
3-pin)  
Connect the external audio equipment or microphone to  
this connector. Set the AUDIO IN REAR LINE/MIC select  
switch according to the connected equipment.  
To record the audio of this connector, set the CH-1 AUDIO  
[DV] connector  
Using a DV cable (optional), a digital video component with  
DV connector can be connected here.  
This connector is used for output of the DV signal or to  
input the VCR control signal from the digital video  
component with DV connector.  
4
1
Only CH1 audio can be outputted for audio signals.  
5
INPUT switch  
page 14 to "REAR".  
(AUDIO IN connector)  
or the CH-2 AUDIO INPUT switch  
on  
•
To remote control theVCR with aVCR control signal from  
this connector, set the VCR Setup Menu item No. 050  
REMOTE SELECT to "IEEE1394".  
7
8
[PROMPTER OUTPUT] prompter output connector  
Return video signals of the externalVCR or signals inputted  
to the AUX input connector of the camera remote control  
unit are outputted through VTR/RM multi-pin connector 8.  
9
[EARPHONE] earphone jack  
2
No.  
1
Signal  
This is a mini-jack for connecting an audio monitoring  
earphone. Plug in an earphone or headphone with a 3.5  
mm diameter plug. Audio is outputted in monaural.  
The earphone can also be used to monitor alarm tones  
depending on situations.  
GND  
HOT  
2
1
2
3
COLD  
3
The sound from the monitoring loudspeaker is interrupted  
when an earphone is connected here.  
[AUDIO IN REAR LINE/MIC] AUDIO IN REAR select  
switch  
5
[DC OUTPUT] connector  
3
Selects the audio signal input to the  
connector.  
AUDIO IN REAR  
4
Power output connector to a wireless microphone  
transmitter, etc.The supply voltage is identical to the voltage  
supplied to the unit (DC 12V max. 0.1 A).  
LINE : Set to this position when connected to audio  
equipment, etc.The reference input level is +4 dBs.  
MIC : Set to this position when the microphone is  
connected. The reference input level is -60 dBs.  
MIC +48V ON:  
4
1
No.  
1
Signal  
GND  
—
2
Set to this position when the microphone requiring  
+48 V power supply (phantom microphone, etc.) is  
connected.  
3
—
4
DC +12V (power through)  
3
2
This connector supplies +48 V DC current.  
(Surface profile)  
21  
22  
2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS  
2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS  
2-6 Rear Section (Cont'd)  
2-7 Counter Display Contents  
The counter display shows the following 4 types of information.  
OPERATE/WARNING  
[AUDIO IN FRONT LINE/MIC] AUDIO IN FRONT  
select switch  
6
[BREAKER]  
!
LIGHT  
ON  
OFF  
OVER  
dB  
CH  
CH  
1
2
AUTO OFF DEW  
RESET  
40 30  
20  
10  
0
1. Tape counter display  
OVER SERVO RF  
L
i
The breaker trips when the power consumption exceeds  
the capacity.  
If the breaker trips, confirm that the power consumption  
does not exceed the wattage rating.Then press BREAKER  
before turning the power ON again to put the camera in the  
operating status.  
If the unit still does not work normally, please consult the  
person in charge of professional video equipment at your  
nearest JVC-authorized service agent.  
32k  
48k  
SLAVE  
PB  
NDF  
HOLD  
Selects the audio signal input to the AUDIO IN FRONT  
The counter display usually functions as a tape counter  
(hour, minute, second, frame). It can be switched to a CTL  
counter, time code or user's bit display by using the  
COUNTER switch. (When the VCR Setup Menu item No.  
516 DISPLAY SELECT is set to “TC”.)  
SP  
WIDE  
AUD LOCK  
MENU  
MONITOR  
COUNTER  
CTL  
TC  
UB  
SELECT  
H
M
S
F
connector on page 10.  
3
CH-1  
E
BATT  
F
REMAIN  
REV FWD  
MIX  
CH-2  
COUNTER  
switch  
H
M
LINE : Set to this position when connected to audio  
equipment, etc.The reference input level is +4 dBs.  
MIC : Set to this position when the microphone is  
connected. The reference input level is -60 dBs.  
MIC +48V ON:  
• CTL counter: Time between -9 hr. 59 min. 59 sec. 29  
frames and 9 hr. 59 min. 59 sec. 29 (U)/24  
(E) frames can be displayed.  
Counter display  
Set to this position when a microphone requiring +48  
V power supply (phantom microphone, etc.) is  
connected. This connector supplies +48 V DC  
current.  
Use this setting when using the provided  
microphone.  
Tape counter display  
1.  
* CTL counter indication may also corrupt  
at playback of segment which time code  
signal is not continuously recorded.  
CTL  
TC  
UB  
“CTL”  
“TC”  
CTL counter  
H
H
M
M
S
S
F
F
• Time code : Time between 0 hour and 23 hr. 59 min. 59  
sec. 29 (U)/24 (E) frames can be displayed.  
• User's bit : Hexadecimal number from 0 to F is displayed  
in 8 digits.  
When theVCR Setup Menu item No.516 DISPLAY SELECT  
is set to “CLOCK”, the date and time are displayed. Set the  
COUNTER switch to TC or UB.  
“TC”  
CTL  
TC  
UB  
Time code  
CAUTION:  
CTL  
TC  
UB  
When connecting a component that does not require +48  
V power supply, make sure that the switch is not set to this  
position before the connection is made.  
“UB”  
User’s bit  
VCR Setup  
Menu No. 516  
Hour Min Sec  
DISPLAY SELECT  
CTL  
TC  
UB  
Time display  
Date display  
“TC”  
H
M
S
TC: Time (Hour, Min., Sec.) is displayed.  
[INTERCOM] intercom input terminal (XLR 5-pin)  
Input terminal for the intercom headset.  
Connect the JVC Intercom KA-310 to this terminal.  
This terminal is enabled when the VTR/RM connector (26-  
pin) on page 21 is connected to the camera control unit.  
7
CTL  
TC  
UB  
UB: Date (Month, Day, Year) is displayed. (U MODEL)  
UB: Date (Day, Month, Year) is displayed. (E MODEL)  
• Press the MENU button to switch to the VCR Setup Menu  
setting display.  
“CLOCK”  
“UB”  
Month Day  
Day  
Year  
Year  
(U MODEL)  
(E MODEL)  
Month  
(Enabled when the MODE switch  
RM.)  
on page 20 is set to  
6
2. VCR Setup Menu setting display  
This display is used when setting the setup menus. After  
setting of the setup menus, the tape counter display returns.  
For details, see "DISPLAYING AND SETTINGVCR SETUP  
MENUS" on page 73.  
2. VCR Setup Menu display  
4. Error code display  
[DC INPUT] connector (XLR 4-pin)  
8
Power input connector for 12 V DC. Connect with the AA-  
P250 optional AC power adapter.When a cable is connected  
here, the power supply from the battery pack is interrupted  
and the source is switched to the power supplied through  
this connector.  
3. Hour meter display  
The hour meter is displayed by selecting the HM group from  
the VCR Setup Menu.  
3. Hour meter display  
4. Alarm display  
The hour meter data refers to the accumulated head drum  
running time.  
When supplying power to the unit from this connector or  
H
battery, set the POWER switch  
BATT..  
on page 20 to DC IN/  
1
4. Error code/Alarm display  
The error code or alarm indicator is displayed automatically  
in case an abnormal condition occurs with the unit.  
ꢀ See “TROUBLES WITH ERROR CODE OUTPUTS” on  
page 100.  
No.  
Signal  
GND  
—
Remaining Tape Time Display  
This display shows the remaining tape time (minutes/seconds)  
in record and play modes.  
1
2
3
4
1
4
ꢀ See “ALARM INDICATIONS” on page 96.  
• Example: 30 minutes of remaining tape.  
—
2
3
Remaining Battery Power Display  
The 7-dot segment bar display shows the remaining battery  
power. The lighted segment bars decrease as the remaining  
battery power decreases.  
+12V  
REMAIN  
Battery holder  
Mount a Flat Shape type battery pack here.  
9
0
H
M
•
This indicator blinks when remaining tape time is equivalent  
to less than 2 minutes.  
When supplying power to the unit from DC INPUT connector  
or battery- set the POWER switch on page 20 to DC  
•
To display the remaining battery power accurately, set the  
VCR Setup Menu item No. 396 BATTERY TYPE according  
to the type of the battery pack in use.  
8
1
* An alarm sounds as a warning when remaining tape time is  
equivalent to less than 2 minutes in the record mode  
IN/BATT.  
ꢀ See "Attaching a Flat ShapeType Battery Pack" on page  
38.  
E
BATT  
F
All segment bars light when a fully charged  
battery pack is attached.  
REMAIN  
Battery holder lock release knob  
This knob is used to open the battery case cover.Press the  
knob to open the cover.  
H
M
E
BATT  
The last 2 segment bars and "BATT" start  
to blink when the battery is nearly  
exhausted. Replace with a fully charged  
battery pack.  
•
The following display appears when no videocassette is  
loaded or during the calculation of remaining tape that takes  
place immediately after a videocassette is inserted.  
For servicing  
See the service manual page 1-1,  
“1.1 RESETING THE POWER CIRCUIT PROTECTION BREAKER”.  
←
REMAIN  
E
BATT  
When the battery capacity has run out, "E"  
and "BATT" blink and the unit stops  
operation automatically.  
H
M
23  
24  
2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS  
2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS  
2-9 1.5-Inch Viewfinder (optional)  
2-8 Lens (optional)  
[S14 x 7.3B12]  
•
•
•
Pressing the W section of this lever increases the angle  
of the lens for a wider shooting angle.  
Pressing theT section of this lever narrows the lens angle  
perspective for telephoto shots.  
[VF-P115B]  
Stopper screw  
This screw prevents the viewfinder from coming off the  
camera.  
1
e
w
q
6
Pushing harder changes the speed of the zoom.  
Mounting guide  
To attach on the camera.  
2
3
4
5
6
IRIS mode switch  
A: Activates the auto iris feature.  
M: Allows manual iris control.  
7
8
9
Connector  
Connect to the camera.  
Momentary auto iris button  
When the IRIS MODE switch is at "M", pushing this button  
activates the Auto Iris Function while it is held down only.  
[CONT] contrast adjustment  
To adjust the contours of the viewfinder image.  
7
1
[BRIGHT] brightness adjustment  
To adjust the brightness of the viewfinder.  
RET  
M
A
[S] IRIS speed adjusting control  
For adjusting the iris operation speed.  
W
T
[TALLY] switch  
Set this switch to OFF to prevent the tally light from turning  
on and informing people that they are being recorded.  
However, the REC indicator lamp in the eyepiece will not  
turn off.  
Memo:  
4
5
2
3
If the speed becomes too fast, hunting may occur.  
To avoid the phenomena described above, perform  
adjustment again.  
7
r
t
y
u i o  
FILTER thread  
0
Tally light  
7
8
Protect the lens with a clear filter or UV filter by screwing  
the filter onto the thread inside the lens hood from the front.  
Other filters can be used for various effects.  
Lights when recording is in progress. To prevent this light  
from coming on, set the tally switch to "OFF".  
6
!
!
Eyepiece  
CAUTION:  
Ensures that ambient light does not reach the viewfinder  
screen or falls into the eye of the cameraman.  
The eyepiece can be opened to allow direct observation of  
the viewfinder screen.  
The filter thread section rotates, so pay attention when  
mounting a polarizing filter.  
ZOOM servo connector  
Connect an optional zoom servo unit here.  
!
@
Eyepiece focusing ring  
Loosen this ring to move the eyepiece back or forth to adjust  
the diopter.  
9
ZOOM mode knob  
S: Servo zoom mode.Allows operation by the zoom servo  
control lever  
.
6
!
!
!
M: Manual zoom mode.Allows zoom control by the zoom  
lever/ring  
7
.
FOCUS ring  
Manual focus ring.  
2
1
2
BACK FOCUS ring/fixing screw  
For back focus adjustment only.Secure with the screw knob  
after adjustment.  
#
$
ZOOM lever/ring  
This is the manual zoom ring equipped with a zoom lever.  
To adjust the zoom manually, turn the zoom mode knob  
to position "M".  
ꢀ See “Back Focus Adjustment” on page 46.  
@
Macro focusing ring (for close-up shooting)  
IRIS ring  
3
By rotating this ring in the direction of the arrow, close-up  
shooting of very small objects becomes possible.  
Normal focus adjustment and zooming are not available in  
the macro mode.  
To shoot images in the macro mode, set the focus ring to  
the infinite position and the zoom ring to the maximum  
wide-angle position.To adjust the focus of the macro image,  
rotate this ring in the direction of the arrow until the object  
is focused.  
8
Manual iris ring.To activate the auto iris feature, set the Iris  
Mode switch to A.  
7
9
[VTR] Trigger button  
To start/stop shooting.  
4
5
1
2
[RET] return video button  
•
•
•
When GY-DV550 is in the record-pause or stop mode,  
press this button to check the immediately preceding  
image recorded.  
When the camera control unit is connected, the return  
video signals can be monitored on the viewfinder while  
pushing this button.  
When an external VCR is connected, the return video  
and return audio signals can be monitored while pushing  
this button.  
CAUTION:  
• The back-focus knob is located close to the macro ring,  
be careful not to mistake the back-focus knob for the  
macro ring.  
• After the required operation, be sure to return the macro  
focusing ring to the normal position.  
(When VTR SELECT switch is set to EXT.)  
ꢀ See “Attaching the Zoom Lens (optional)” on page 33.  
ꢀ See “Back Focus Adjustment” on page 46.  
ZOOM servo control lever  
6
To operate the servo zoom feature with this lever, set the  
ZOOM knob to S.  
@
25  
26  
2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS  
2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS  
2-10 Indications in Viewfinder  
2-10 Indications in Viewfinder (Cont'd)  
WARNING LED INDICATORS INSIDE THE VIEWFINDER  
ACCU - FOCUS  
ACCU - FOCUS  
q
w
q
w
The viewfinder has two LED indicators below the screen. These LEDs  
light or blink to indicate the present status of the camera or the VCR.  
SCENE F I LE  
WH I T E BA L  
F I LTER  
A
A
G
F
G
F
3 . 2K  
1 / 10 00  
6dB  
●
[BATT] battery lamp  
e
r
t
e
r
t
SHUTTER  
GA I N  
This lights red when the battery voltage becomes too low for  
operating the camera.  
I
I
I R I S LEVEL  
I R I S DETECT  
FULL AUTO  
REC T IME  
NORMAL  
NORMAL  
OFF  
u
SD  
B
SD  
B
●
REC/ALARM lamp  
REC2  
EXT  
F5 . 6  
STBY  
!5  
y
y
!
CH1 -  
CH2 -  
-
-
-
-
<
-
-
- + -  
- + -  
6 0  
-
-
<60  
The internalVCR status is displayed when theVTR SELECT  
M : 099  
1 2 . 4V  
3
switch is set to INT or PARA.  
REC  
BATT  
ALARM  
This lights or blinks green under the following circumstances.  
Steady green : During recording.  
!
4
o
!2  
!
0
i
!1  
u
Blinks green : • While the GY-DV550 switches from  
record-pause to recording.  
BATT  
Lamp  
REC/ALARM  
Lamp  
Status 0  
Status 1  
Status 2  
• Immediately before the tape is running out  
or when it has run out.  
• When an error occurs in the GY-DV550.  
The external VCR status is displayed when VTR SELECT  
switch is set to EXT.  
●
Status 0  
Steady green : During recording.  
Blinks green : • Immediately before the tape is running out.  
• When an error occurs in the VCR.  
Display Position  
Display  
Function  
VIEWFINDER SCREEN DISPLAY  
ACCU-FOCUS Blinks during the ACCU-FOCUS operation.  
1
The following indications are displayed on the viewfinder screen.  
(However, this information is not displayed while theVCR section  
is playing back a tape.)  
SKIN AREA  
Blinks while the skin tone detail color area is displayed.  
S
Displayed when the SHUTTER or V-SCAN is ON.  
Displayed when the Full Auto Shooting is ON.  
Displayed when the ALC alone is ON.  
Ⅲ Status screens (screens for use in checking the current  
FAS  
camera settings)  
OPERATE/WARNING  
LIGHT  
Ⅲ Alarm message display  
MODE  
RM  
VTR  
ON  
ALC  
RESET  
OFF  
MONITOR  
SELECT  
CH-1  
MIX  
CH-2  
INCOM  
MIC  
Ⅲ Time date display  
COUNTER  
CTL  
TC  
UB  
FILTER  
3200k  
5600k+1/8ND  
5600k+1/64ND  
CARBON  
DYNAMIC  
ALARM  
1
2
3
IEEE 1394  
Displayed when VCR Setup menu No.126 VIDEO INPUT is set to IEEE1394.  
Displayed during external video signal input.  
Ⅲ Safety zone display  
INCOM  
MIC  
ON  
LEVEL  
SHUTTER STATUS  
MENU  
MONITOR  
STATUS  
button  
Ⅲ Setting screen  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
AUX  
G
AUTO  
FRONT  
REAR  
MANUAL  
AUDIO SELECT  
AUDIO INPUT  
OFF  
(screen for use in the camera and VCR setup)  
Ⅲ Auto white balance display  
Ⅲ Shutter speed display  
AUDIO  
LEVEL  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CALL  
AUTO IRIS  
FULL AUTO BLACK  
LOLUX  
Displayed in other modes than 0 dB, LOLUX and ALC.  
2
BACK  
NORMAL  
SPOT  
L
STRETCH  
RM  
OFF  
DC IN  
/BATT.  
NORMAL  
COMPRESS  
L
L
Displayed during LOLUX operation.  
POWER  
Not displayed  
during external  
video signal  
input (when the  
VCR INPUT  
switch is set to  
AUX).  
Ⅲ Status Screens  
NG  
OPERATE  
ON  
OFF  
F
Displayed when FAW alone is ON.  
3
4
5
6
Press the STATUS button during normal screen display to show  
one of the status screens in the viewfinder. One of the three  
status screens will be displayed every time the button is pressed.  
(Status 0, 1, 2)  
I
Displayed when IRIS BACK LIGHT or IRIS SPOT LIGHT is selected.  
Displayed while the Skin Detail function is in operation.  
SD  
B
The status 2 screen will not appear during external video signal  
input (when the VTR INPUT switch is set to AUX).  
Displayed when BLACK STRETCH or BLACK COMPRESSION is  
selected.  
In addition, AUX will appear on the upper right of status screen  
0 and 1 and camera setting related display will not be made.  
Event display  
See the table below.  
7
• VTR INPUT switch: During CAM setting  
7Event display ... Not displayed during external video signal input or IEEE1394 input.  
Event is displayed in the viewfinder for only about 2 seconds when any of the following switches is operated.  
ACCU - FOCUS  
ACCU - FOCUS  
SCENE F I LE  
WH I T E BA L  
F I LTER  
A
A
G
F
G
F
Switch  
Event Display Contents  
3 . 2K  
1 / 1000  
6dB  
NORMAL  
NORMAL  
OFF  
SHUTTER  
GA I N  
I R I S LEVEL  
I R I S DETECT  
FULL AUTO  
REC T I ME  
ZEBRA  
BLACK  
GAIN  
ZEBRA  
BLACK  
ON, OFF  
I
I
STRETCH, NORMAL, COMPRESS  
–3 dB, 0 dB, 3 dB, 6 dB, 9 dB, 12 dB, 18 dB, ALC  
A, B, PRESET, FAW  
SD  
B
SD  
B
REC2  
EXT  
F5 . 6  
STBY  
GAIN  
CH1 -  
CH2 -  
-
-
-
-
<
-
-
- + -  
- + -  
6 0  
-
-
<60  
M : 099  
M : 099  
1 2 . 4V  
WHT. BAL  
FULL AUTO  
AUTO IRIS  
LOLUX  
WHITE BAL  
FULL AUTO  
IRIS  
Status 0  
Status 1  
Status 2  
ON, OFF  
• VTR INPUT switch: During AUX setting  
BACK L, NORMAL, SPOT L  
ON, OFF  
AUX  
AUX  
LOLUX  
FILTER  
VTR  
FILTER knob  
VTR  
3.2K, 5.6K+1/8ND, 5.6K+1/64ND  
STBY, SAVE  
AUTO KNEE  
AUTO KNEE  
ON, OFF  
CH1 -  
CH2 -  
-
-
-
-
<
-
-
- + -  
- + -  
6 0  
-
-
I NT  
M : 099  
M : 099  
1 2 . 4V  
STBY  
Status 0  
Status 1  
27  
28  
2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS  
2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS  
2-10 Indications in Viewfinder (Cont'd)  
2-10 Indications in Viewfinder (Cont'd)  
●
Status 1  
Ⅲ Alarm Message Display  
In addition to the information on the Status 0 screen, this screen displays audio indicators and information on remaining  
tape, voltage and lens F-number (or FILTER POSITION).  
ACCU - FOCUS  
G
F
Function  
Display position  
Display  
(Example)  
The following alarm messages are displayed on the status 0 and status 1  
screens.  
Event display is not made when an alarm message is displayed in alarm  
message display 2.  
Alarm message display 1  
Shows the input level of the audio input channel.  
Display ON/OFF can be selected using the VF DISPLAY menu screen.  
ꢀ See "AUDIO DISPLAY" on page 78.  
8
I
CH1- - - - + - -  
CH2- - - - + - -  
STBY  
Alarm message display 2  
B
VCR in standby mode  
Note:  
9
CH1 -  
CH2 -  
-
-
-
-
<
-
-
- + -  
- + -  
6 0  
-
-
SAVE  
VCR in save mode  
F5 . 6  
STBY  
When the RS-232C cable  
is connected, the VCR  
operation mode may not  
be displayed correctly.  
STOP  
VCR in stop mode  
1 2 . 4V  
REC  
VCR in record mode  
VCR in fast-forward mode  
VCR in rewind mode  
VCR in eject mode  
FF  
Indication  
Contents  
REW  
EJECT  
CLOSE CASSETTE COVER  
VTR WARNING [HEAD]  
VTR WARNING [SERVO]  
VTR WARNING [DEW]  
VTR WARNING [HARD]  
VTR WARNING [STOP]  
VTR WARNING [REW]  
The cassette cover is not closed.  
Head clogging  
Servo error  
Condensation  
Hardware error  
(Example)  
< 60  
(Example)  
12: 34: 56: 20  
Remaining tape indication (displayed in 1-minute steps)  
0
When the tape is used for a long time, the remaining tape may not be  
indicated accurately.At the beginning of the tape, in particular, the indication  
may show smaller value than the actual one.  
1
2
Time code display  
Operation stopped  
Rewinding abnormality  
Time code display is available when the "RECTIME" item on theVF DISPLAY  
menu screen is set to TIME CODE.  
TAPE NEAR END  
TAPE END  
Remaining tape time is less than about 2 minutes in the record mode  
Tape end reached  
REC INHIBITAn unrecordable videocassette (the switch on the back of the cassette is  
set to SAVE) is inserted.  
ꢀ See "REC TIME" on page 78.  
Voltage indication (displayed in 0.1 V steps) The indicator flashes when the  
battery is low.The indicator will not appear when the camera remote control  
unit is connected.  
The F-number of the connected lens or the filter position of the unit is displayed.  
Whether to display the F-number or filter position, or no display is selected in  
F. NO/FILTER of the VF DISPLAY screen.  
The F-number may not be displayed depending on the lens type or when  
the lens is removed. ꢀ See page 78  
Not displayed during external video signal input or IEEE1394 input.  
In the Super Scene Finder (S.S.F.) mode, the number of memorized scenes  
(Example)  
12.4V  
A
B
F-number:  
NO TAPE  
VTR trigger is pressed with no tape loaded.  
OPEN, F2, F2.8, F4,  
F5.6, F8, F11, F16,  
CLOSE  
•
FILTER:  
FIL1, FIL2, FIL3  
(Example)  
M: 099  
Ⅲ Time/Date Display  
C
D
is shown.  
Time/date display  
M: In MARK mode  
2000 / 06 / 15  
20 :15:15  
ACCU - FOCUS  
C : In CUE mode  
When setting DISPLAY item of the TIME DATE menu screen to ON, the time  
and date will appear as shown in the diagram on the left. The time and date  
are recorded on tape during recording as well.  
For the display formats of the time and date, ꢀ see page 84.  
For setting the time and date, see page 43.  
Number: Number of memorized scenes  
Displays whether the main unit is used for recording or the external VCR  
connected to the VTR/RM multi-pin connector.  
The displays will differ depending on the VTR SELECT switch setting.  
INT is constantly displayed during external video input or IEEE1394 input.  
INT is constantly displayed when the VTR/RM switch is set to RM.  
The display will light during external VCR recording.  
The display flashes when there is a warning on the external VCR.  
The display will not appear when the VTR/RM switch is set to RM.  
G
F
I
EXT, INT, PARA  
REC2  
SD  
B
REC2  
EXT  
F5 . 6  
STBY  
CH1 -  
CH2 -  
-
-
-
-
>
-
-
- + -  
- + -  
6 0  
-
-
C : 123  
1 2 . 4V  
E
●
Status 2 ... Not displayed during external video signal input or IEEE1394 input.  
This screen displays the camera setup statuses.  
Event display is not available while this screen is displayed.  
Indication  
SCENE FILE  
Indication Contents  
A, B, OFF  
WHITE BAL  
FILTER  
A, B, PRESET, FAW, MANUAL (When remote control unit w/manual balance is connected.)  
3.2K, 5.6K+1/8ND, 5.6K+1/64ND  
SHUTTER  
OFF, 1/100 (U)/1/120(E), 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000, 1/60.1 (U)/1/50.1 (E) to 1/2084.6 (U)/  
1/2067.8 (E) (in VARIABLE mode), EEI (in ALC mode)  
-3dB, 0dB, 3dB, 6dB, 9dB, 12dB, 18dB, LOLUX, ALC  
NORMAL, BACK L, SPOT L  
GAIN  
IRIS LEVEL  
FULL AUTO  
REC TIME  
ON, OFF  
Remaining tape time or time code.  
29  
30  
2. CONTROLS, INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS  
3. BASIC SYSTEM CONNECTIONS AND ADJUSTMENTS  
2-10 Indication in Viewfinder (Cont'd)  
3-1 Basic System  
For information on connection with the individual attachments, refer to the page explaining the respective connection methods.  
Ⅲ Safety Zone  
Two types of safety zone items can be displayed in the viewfinder. Select the required one with the SAFETY ZONE item on the  
VF DISPLAY menu screen. The CENTER MARK item can be used to select whether the safety zone center mark indicator  
should be displayed or not (ON/OFF).  
LOCAL REMOTE  
CONTROL UNIT  
RM-LP55  
RM-LP57  
CAMERA REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
RM-P200 RM-P300  
ULTRA LIGHT  
(ANTON BAUER.PROTEC)  
VIEWFINDER  
VF-P400  
BATTERY  
NP-1B TYPE  
BATTERY CHARGER  
OFF  
NORMAL  
16:9  
MICROPHONE  
MV-P615  
3P  
BATTERY  
NP-1B TYPE  
SHOULDER BELT  
MIC HOLDER  
KA-A50  
VF HOLDER  
KA-A40  
Ⅲ Setting the Screen Display  
-
-
-
CAMERA MENU  
-
-
-
Screen used for making various settings of the camera and VCR.  
ꢀ See "Camera Menu Screen Flow" on page 76.  
ꢀ See "VCR Setup Menu" on page 72.  
SCENE F I L E  
VF D I SPLAY MENU .  
OPERAT I ON MENU .  
PROCESS MENU .  
F I LE MANAGE .  
SETUP MENU .  
: A  
.
.
.
1.5" VIEW FINDER  
VF-P115B  
.
BATTERY HOLDER  
BH-P27  
.
(
)
NB-G1 4PACK BATTERY CHARGER  
(AC POWER ADAPTER)  
AA-G11  
VF-P116  
T I ME DATE MENU .  
EX I T  
.
DV CAMCORDER  
BATTERY  
NB-G1  
OPERATE/WARNING  
LIGHT  
ON  
OFF  
MODE  
RM  
VTR  
MICROPHONE  
RESET  
MONITOR  
SELECT  
INCOM  
MIC  
COUNTER  
CTL  
FILTER  
3200k  
5600k+1/8ND  
5600k+1/64ND  
CH-1  
MIX  
CH-2  
CARBON  
DYNAMIC  
1
2
3
ALARM  
TC  
UB  
INCOM  
MIC  
ON  
LEVEL  
SHUTTER STATUS  
MENU  
MONITOR  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
AUTO  
FRONT  
REAR  
MANUAL  
A
U
D
I
O
S
E
L
E
C
T
A
U
D
I
O
I
N
P
U
T
OFF  
CH-1 AUDIO CH-2  
LEVEL  
CALL  
A
U
T
O
I
R
I
S
F
U
L
L
A
U
T
O
B
L
A
C
K
LOLUX  
BACK  
NORMAL  
SPOT  
L
STRETCH  
RM  
OFF  
DC IN  
/BATT.  
NORMAL  
COMPRESS  
L
POWER  
NG  
OPERATE  
4P  
4P  
ON  
OFF  
VIDEO LIGHT  
(ANTON BAUER.  
PROTEC)  
(
)
VC-710 5m  
AC  
AC POWER ADAPTER  
(
)
NB-G1 BATTERY CHARGER  
AA-P250  
ZOOM LENS  
S14 x 7.3B12(FUJINON)  
S16 x 6.7B12(FUJINON)  
S19 x 6.5B12(FUJINON)  
YH14 x 7.3K12(CANON)  
YH18 x 6.7K12(CANON)  
TRIPOD BASE  
Ⅲ Auto White Balance Display  
This screen appears during the auto white balance adjustment operation to display various  
GY-DV550  
STANDARD PACKAGE  
data.  
ꢀ See "White Balance Adjustment" on page 47.  
ANTON BAUER  
BATTERY CHARGER  
ANTON BAUER  
BATTERY HOLDER  
(QRQ27)  
ANTON BAUER BATTERY  
A UTO WH I T E  
OPERA T I ON  
A
(
,
,
PRO PAC MAGNUM  
FOCUS MANUAL UNIT  
,
)
TRIMPAC HYTRON  
(
)
HZ-FM13 FUJINON  
(
)
HZ-FM15 CANON  
TRIPOD  
TP-P300  
IEEE1394 CABLE  
VX-DV110(1m)  
VX-DV120(2m) 4P-4P  
VX-DV130(3m)  
ZOOM SERVO UNIT  
HZ-ZS13B  
VX-DV210(1m)  
VX-DV220(2m)  
VX-DV230(3m)  
DOLLY  
TP-P205  
4P-6P  
RS232C CABLE  
VC-P893(PC/AT)  
Y/C CABLE  
VCG30, VCG50  
BNC CABLE  
HZ-FM13 cannot be used with S14X7.3B12/U.  
Please use the Focus Manual Unit (FMM-8, CHF-3, CFC-12-990) manufactured by Fujinon.  
Ⅲ Shutter Speed Display  
When the SHUTTER dial is pressed, a shutter speed is displayed (for approx. 5 sec.).  
In addition, whenever the shutter speed is altered by using the SHUTTER dial, the shutter  
speed is displayed. While this display is shown, other displays disappear.  
ꢀ See "SHUTTER dial" on page 12.  
SHUT T ER  
1
/
1 0 0 0  
31  
32  
3. BASIC SYSTEM CONNECTIONS AND ADJUSTMENTS  
3. BASIC SYSTEM CONNECTIONS AND ADJUSTMENTS  
3-2 Attaching the Zoom Lens (optional)  
3-4 Attaching the Microphone (provided)  
Provided Microphone  
Connecting the provided microphone to the viewfinder.  
The provided microphone is a phantom microphone.  
1. Loosen the mount ring.  
2. Connect the cable connector.  
3. Attach the lens with its pin aligned with the hole in the mount.  
1.3.  
1. Loosen the stopper screw on the viewfinder.  
2.Attach the microphone to the attachment guide on the  
viewfinder as illustrated.  
4.  
3. Confirm that there is no gap between the microphone and  
the viewfinder, and then tighten the stopper screw.  
2.  
1
4.  
3.  
4. Tighten the microphone screw. The microphone should be  
firmly attached.  
4. Tighten the mount ring.  
5. Connect the cable from the microphone to the AUDIO IN  
FRONT connector on the front section of the camera.  
CAUTION:  
Be sure to tighten the mount ring completely. Incomplete  
tightening may result in the lens dropping off or disturbed  
back focus.  
6. Secure the microphone cable using the cable clamp located  
2.  
on the front of the camera.  
5.  
CAUTION:  
Pin  
Hole  
When this microphone is attached, the range that the  
viewfinder can be moved to the left will be reduced.Please  
purchase a separately sold microphone if you prefer to  
observe through the viewfinder using your left eye.  
3-5 Attaching the Microphone (optional)  
1.  
2.4.  
With the optional KA-A50 microphone holder, the optional  
Mount ring  
microphones MV-P615 (Phantom microphone) can be used.  
Ⅲ Attaching the Microphone with KA-A50  
1. Secure the microphone holder with 2 screws.  
When unplugging the cable connector, first remove the lens  
itself. Then grasp this portion and pull straight out.  
2. Turn the small knob located on the outer side of the  
microphone holder anticlockwise to loosen it, and loosen  
the large knob located on the inner side in the same way.  
Rotate the large knob fully anticlockwise to open the holder.  
3-3 Attaching the Viewfinder (optional)  
3. Attach the microphone to the microphone holder so that  
the microphone does not interfere with the cassette cover.  
Sliding  
securing ring  
1. Loosen the stopper screw on the viewfinder.  
2. Connect the connector.  
Mounting guide  
5
KA-A50  
Microphone holder  
1
4
4. Set the microphone holder so that the height is level, and  
tighten the inside and outside knobs to secure the  
microphone.  
3.  
3. Align the mounting guide with the camera’s viewfinder mount  
Stopper  
screw  
base and attach the viewfinder.  
5. Connect the microphone cable to the AUDIO IN FRONT  
connector.  
4. Tighten the stopper screw.  
6. Secure the microphone cable using the cable clamp located  
5. Tighten the sliding securing ring.  
Viewfinder  
mount  
base  
on the front of the camera.  
*
To detach the viewfinder, reverse the mounting procedure.  
7. Make sure to perform the correct settings for use of a  
2
phantom microphone.  
Connector  
Note:  
•
When the light mounted on the camera is used at the  
same time, if the microphone in use has a long sound  
collecting section (ultra-directional type, etc.), the  
microphone's shadow may influence the image.  
AUDIO IN FRONT  
connector  
Microphone  
cable  
MV-P615  
33  
34  
3. BASIC SYSTEM CONNECTIONS AND ADJUSTMENTS  
3. BASIC SYSTEM CONNECTIONS AND ADJUSTMENTS  
3-6 Attaching the Tripod Base (provided)  
3-8 Inserting and Replacing Backup Lithium Batteries  
The GY-DV550 uses a lithium battery for backup of the time code data and time date data. Install the provided lithium battery before  
actually using the unit.  
Use the provided tripod base to place the camera on a tripod.  
1. Attach the tripod base on the tripod by using the hole that  
● Lithium battery: CR2032  
balances the unit most optimally.  
"Li" indicator  
2. While pushing the safety lever, pull the lock lever toward  
CAUTION:  
the front until the front mount clip clicks into place.  
1. Tripod mounting holes  
If the unit is not used for a lengthy period of time (one  
month or more), remove the lithium battery. If the voltage  
of the lithium battery becomes low, the set may malfunction.  
Pin  
3. Place the unit on the tripod base by aligning the rear base  
Front mount clip  
mount of the unit with the pin on the tripod base.  
OPERATE/WARNING  
LIGHT  
CH  
1
OVER AUTO OFF DEW  
dB  
MODE  
RM  
VTR  
ON  
RESET  
4
0
3
0
20  
10  
0
4. Push the unit from the upward direction and slide it toward  
the front so that the front base mount of the unit is locked  
by the front mount clip of the tripod base as it clicks into  
place.  
O
V
E
R
S
E
R
V
O
R
F
L
i
OFF  
CH  
2
32k  
48k  
SLAVE  
PB  
NDF  
HOLD  
AUD LOCK SP  
MONITOR  
INCOM  
MIC  
WIDE  
SELECT  
MENU  
COUNTER  
CTL  
TC  
UB  
H
M
S
F
FILTER  
3200k  
5600k+1/8ND  
5600k+1/64ND  
CH-1  
REMAIN  
E
BATT  
F
CARBON  
DYNAMIC  
ALARM  
MIX  
CH-2  
R
E
V
F
W
D
1
2
3
H
M
INCOM  
MIC  
ON  
AUDIO  
LEVEL  
LEVEL  
CH-1  
CH-2  
SHUTTER STATUS  
MENU  
MONITOR  
2. Safety lever  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
AUTO  
FRONT  
REAR  
AUTO  
FRONT  
REAR  
MANUAL  
AUDIO SELECT  
AUDIO INPUT  
MANUAL  
OFF  
2.  
AUDIO  
CH-2  
LEVEL  
CH-1  
CALL  
AUDIO SELECT  
VTR SELECT TC GENE.  
AUDIO INPUT  
AUTO IRIS  
FULL AUTO BLACK  
LOLUX  
CAUTION:  
BACK  
NORMAL  
SPOT  
L
STRETCH  
I
/T.  
Lock lever  
NORMAL  
COMPRESS  
SEE  
CONTINUE  
REC  
FREE  
MENU  
L
INSTR-  
UCTION  
MANUAL  
INT  
PRST  
REGEN  
PARA  
EXT  
• The front base mount may be locked while the pin of the  
tripod base is not inserted into the hole on the rear base  
mount of the unit. Therefore, after mounting, make sure  
that these parts are engaged properly.  
POWER  
LITHIUM BATT.  
GROUP  
HOLD  
ITEM  
SHIFT  
SELECT  
DATA SET  
CAM AUX  
ADVANCE PRESET  
NG  
OPERATE  
ON  
OFF  
4.  
Front  
base  
mount  
VTR INPUT  
• When moving the unit mounted on a tripod, any impact  
or vibration should be avoided as this may cause the unit  
to become detached and to drop from the tripod.  
Be sure to remove the unit from the tripod before  
transporting it.  
Lithium battery case  
3.  
mount  
OPERATE switch  
Rear base  
When the lithium battery is not in place or the battery is exhausted and requires a replacement, the "Li" indicator in the LCD display  
will light up.  
4.  
•
The tripod base (KA-510) cannot be mounted.  
Replace lithium batteries with the OPERATE switch set to ON. Doing it with the OPERATE switch set to OFF will cause the loss of  
backup data.  
OPERATE/WARNING  
LIGHT  
ON  
OFF  
MODE  
RM  
VTR  
RESET  
MONITOR  
INCOM  
MIC  
SELECT  
COUNTER  
CTL  
TC  
UB  
FILTER  
3200k  
5600k+1/8ND  
5600k+1/64ND  
CH-1  
CARBON  
DYNAMIC  
ALARM  
MIX  
CH-2  
1
2
3
INCOM  
MIC  
ON  
LEVEL  
SHUTTER STATUS  
MENU  
MONITOR  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
AUTO  
FRONT  
REAR  
MANUAL  
AUDIO SELECT  
AUDIO INPUT  
OFF  
CH-1 AUDIO CH-2  
LEVEL  
CALL  
A
U
T
O
I
R
I
S
F
U
L
L
A
U
T
O
B
L
A
C
K
LOLUX  
BACK  
NORMAL  
SPOT  
L
STRETCH  
RM  
OFF  
DC IN  
/BATT.  
NORMAL  
COMPRESS  
L
POWER  
Ⅲ How to Install the Lithium Battery  
Ⅲ How to Remove Lithium Batteries  
NG  
OPERATE  
ON  
OFF  
Lithium battery cover  
RESET switch  
Ⅲ
The lithium battery is easily  
CR2032  
CR2032  
removed if you press at the edge  
of the lithium battery at the place  
indicated in the illustration on the  
left and then pull the battery out.  
LITHIUM BATT.  
CR2032  
3-7 Attaching the 4-inch Viewfinder (Optional)  
1. Push the lithium battery cover in the direction of the arrow  
Use the optional viewfinder holder (KA-A40) to mount the 4-  
inch viewfinder (VF-P400) on the unit.  
as illustrated and remove the cover.  
VF-P400  
1. Mount the viewfinder holder on the handle section of the  
2.Slide the battery into place with its  
marked surface facing  
unit.  
upward.  
Lock lever  
* Mount it so that the stopper pin of the viewfinder holder  
comes to face the front of the unit.  
3.Return the lithium battery cover to its original position in the  
unit.  
mount screw  
stopper pin  
mount screw  
2. Fix the viewfinder holder securely using two screws.  
Note:  
CAUTION:  
Unless the screws are securely fixed, the viewfinder may  
Do not press the RESET switch when installing or removing  
the lithium battery.  
handle  
drop. Exercise maximum caution.  
KA-A40  
PUSH  
3. Loosen the lock lever of the 4-inch viewfinder, and slide the  
viewfinder forward along the viewfinder holder guide.  
DV CAMCORDER  
GY-DV550  
VTR/RM  
4. Turn clockwise the lock lever of the 4-inch viewfinder and  
fix it.  
5. Connect the viewfinder cable connector to the viewfinder  
PROMPTER  
OUTPUT  
GENLOCK/AUX IN  
VIDEO OUT  
CLH-I1NE OUT  
CH-2  
Y/C OUT MONITOR OUT  
connector of the unit.  
REMOTE  
AUDIO IN  
FRONT  
TC IN  
TC OUT  
LENS  
For servicing  
To use KA-510, see the service manual page 1-20,  
“1.12.8 Trpod base”.  
←
35  
36  
4. POWER SUPPLY  
4. POWER SUPPLY  
The GY-DV550 is operable with AC power supply or battery pack.  
4-2 Battery Pack Operation (Cont'd)  
ATTACHING A FLAT SHAPE TYPE BATTERY PACK  
To operate the unit using AC power supply or battery, set the  
POWER switch to DC IN/BATT.  
CAUTION:  
When supplying power to the unit from cameral control  
unit through the VTR/RM multi-pin connector, set the  
POWER switch to RM.  
It is not possible to supply power to the main unit from an  
external VCR through the VTR/RM multi-pin connector.  
OPERATE/WARNING  
LIGHT  
MODE  
RM  
VTR  
ON  
RESET  
OFF  
1. Open the battery case cover while pushing the lock release  
MONITOR  
SELECT  
CH-1  
MIX  
CH-2  
INCOM  
MIC  
COUNTER  
CTL  
TC  
UB  
FILTER  
3200k  
5600k+1/8ND  
5600k+1/64ND  
CARBON  
DYNAMIC  
ALARM  
1
2
3
lever.  
INCOM  
MIC  
ON  
LEVEL  
SHUTTER STATUS  
MENU  
MONITOR  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
AUTO  
FRONT  
REAR  
MANUAL  
AUDIO SELECT  
AUDIO INPUT  
OFF  
2.Insert the battery pack into the battery case with its electrodes  
AUDIO  
LEVEL  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CALL  
AUTO IRIS  
FULL AUTO BLACK  
LOLUX  
BACK  
NORMAL  
SPOT  
L
STRETCH  
RM  
OFF  
DC IN  
/BATT.  
NORMAL  
COMPRESS  
facing the unit.  
L
POWER  
3. Close the battery case cover.  
NG  
OPERATE  
ON  
OFF  
Be sure to set the POWER switch to OFF before replacing  
the battery pack.  
Lock release  
lever  
OPERATE switch  
POWER switch  
4-1 AC Operation  
Use the JVC AA-P250 AC power adapter (max. rated output 12.5 V DC, 3.5 A) as the AC power supply.  
Do not use any power source with large fluctuations in the  
power source voltage, or power sources generating noise,  
such as ripples.  
1.After making sure that the power switches of the GY-DV550  
and of the AA-P250 are set to OFF, connect the DC cable  
from the AA-P250 to the DC INPUT connector of the GY-  
DV550 as shown in the illustration.  
AA-P250  
D
V
L
I
N
E
MIC  
+48V  
ON  
LINE  
MIC  
+48V  
ON  
INTERCOM  
FRONT  
DC INPUT  
EARPHONE  
DC cable  
AUDIO IN  
REAR  
DC  
OUTPUT  
2. When the AA-P250 is used, set the CHARGE/CAMERA  
switch to CAMERA.  
AC power adapter  
3.Set the POWER switch of the main unit to DC IN/BATT, and  
set the OPERATE switch to ON.  
* For details, read the instruction manual of the AA-P250.  
Precautions for Connection with the AC POWER  
ADAPTER(AA-P250)  
Always use the DC cable equipped with a ferrite core and  
supplied with the AA-P250.  
The DC cable VC-710(5m) can not be used.  
If the cable is not equipped with a ferrite core, please contact  
your JVC dealer.  
Note:  
Do not remove or connect the DC cable while recording is  
being performed.  
4-2 Battery Pack Operation  
The GY-DV550 can be operated with the following battery packs.  
Ⅲ Flat shape type battery pack  
Ⅲ Anton-Bauer battery pack  
● Propack 13/14 Series  
● Trimpack 13/14 Series  
● Magnum 13/14 Series  
● Compack 13/14 Series  
*
An Anton-Bauer battery pack cannot be connected  
directly to the GY-DV550. It is necessary to mount the  
optional battery holder.  
Battery holder: Anton-Bauer QRQ27  
For details on how to mount the battery holder, see  
page 39.  
● When the DC cable is connected to the DC INPUT connector, the power supply from the battery pack is interrupted and the  
power starts to be supplied through the DC INPUT connector.  
● Do not connect or disconnect the DC cable while operating with a battery pack.  
The following symptoms may occur if the DC cable is connected or disconnected while operating with a battery pack.  
• The power is cut off for a moment when the DC cable is disconnected.  
• Noise to the video and audio signals occurs. Audio signal are muted.  
● When operation is continued with DC input after the battery pack capacity has been used up, set the OPERATE switch to  
OFF after the DC power is applied. Then switch ON again.  
● If the GY-DV550 is left with the battery pack attached, a small amount of power is consumed even if the OPERATE switch on  
the GY-DV550 is set to OFF. Remove the battery pack when the GY-DV550 is not going to be used.  
37  
38  
4. POWER SUPPLY  
4. POWER SUPPLY  
4-2 Battery Pack Operation (Cont'd)  
USING AN ANTON-BAUER BATTERY PACK  
To use an Anton-Bauer battery pack (Propack 13/14, Trimpack 13/14, Magnum 13/14, Compack 13/14 Series), it is necessary to  
detach the battery case from the GY-DV550 and replace it with the Anton-Bauer battery holder. Use the following battery holder.  
• Battery holder: Anton-Bauer QRQ27  
4-2 Battery Pack Operation (Cont'd)  
REMAINING BATTERY POWER DISPLAY  
WARNING  
indicator  
To display the remaining battery power accurately, set the  
VCR Setup Menu item No.396 BATTERYTYPE according  
to the type of the battery pack in use.  
Remaining battery  
power indication  
ꢀ See page 75.  
E
E
BATT  
BATT  
F
Detaching the Battery Case From the GY-DV550 and Attaching The Anton-Bauer Battery  
TALLY  
lamp  
OPERATE/WARNING  
LIGHT  
ON  
OFF  
MODE  
RM  
VTR  
RESET  
MONITOR  
The status of the remaining battery power can be checked by  
the remaining battery power indication.  
ꢀ See page 24.  
Ⅲ When the remaining battery power is nearly exhausted, the  
following warning messages will appear.In this case, replace  
with a fully charged battery as soon as possible.  
● Remaining battery power indication:  
Segment bar and "BATT" indicator start to blink  
● WARNING indicator and TALLY lamp blink  
● Viewfinder:  
INCOM  
MIC  
SELECT  
COUNTER  
CTL  
TC  
UB  
I
3
5k
5
CH-1  
CARBON  
DYNAMIC  
MIX  
CH-2  
INCOM  
MIC  
ON  
LEVEL  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
AUTO  
FRONT  
REAR  
MANUAL  
AUDIO SELECT  
AUDIO INPUT  
OFF  
CH-1 AUDIO CH-2  
LEVEL  
CALL  
I
ML  
RM  
OFF  
DC IN  
/BATT.  
M
PS  
POWER  
2.  
Connector  
Viewfinder  
Compartment  
5.  
•
•
•
BATT lamp lights.  
TALL lamp blinks.  
During status 1 mode, the voltage display flashes.  
LOW BATTERY  
1. Black screw A  
1. Remove the two black screws A on the battery case.  
● Alarm sound beeps  
REC  
BATT  
ALARM  
BATT lamp  
2. Remove the lower half of the battery case cover in the  
downward direction.  
After the remaining battery power warnings appear, the  
GY-DV550 automatically stops operation if the battery  
power operation is continued.  
3. Mount screw B  
3. Connector  
4.  
5.  
Anton-Bauer  
Battery holder  
4.Connect the connectors protruding from the GY-DV550 with  
the connectors on the battery holder.  
Operating Time with Battery Pack  
* Following connection of the connectors, insert them into  
the connector compartment.  
When the VF-P115B is used as the viewfinder and a fully  
charged battery pack is attached, the approximate continuous  
operating time is as follows:  
● Battery operating time may differ depending on the number  
of times the battery has been charged, charging conditions  
and the operating environment, etc. Use the values in the  
table on the left for approximate reference times.  
● Operating time is reduced in areas with a cold environment.  
● Operating time is reduced when the power zoom lens is used  
frequently.  
3.  
Mount screw  
B
5. Secure the battery holder to the GY-DV550 with the four  
Battery Pack  
NP-1B  
Continuous Operating Time (at 25 ˚C)  
mount screws provided with the battery holder.  
60 minutes  
130 minutes  
80 minutes  
3.To remove the battery case, remove the four screws B fixing  
the battery case and the connector connecting the battery  
case to this unit.  
* Take care not to pinch the wires. This could result in  
damage.  
Magnum 14  
NP-L40  
Attaching and Detaching an Anton-Bauer Battery Pack  
PRECAUTIONS FOR THE BATTERY PACK  
Guide pins  
Cassette cover  
● When the battery pack is not in use, it must be stored in a  
cool, dry place.  
Do not leave the battery pack in a place where it might be  
subject to a high temperature (under direct sunlight in a car,  
etc.), this could cause leakage of the fluid or shorten service  
life.  
● When the terminal section of the battery pack gets dirty, the  
operating time will be shortened.  
● If the operating time becomes greatly reduced even  
immediately after recharging, the service life of the battery  
pack is nearly finished. Purchase a new battery pack.  
Attaching the Battery Pack  
Recharging  
side panel  
Battery  
pack  
● Recharge the battery pack after completely discharging it.  
Repeated recharging with residual charge remaining could  
result in reduced battery capacity.  
Guide holes  
(x3)  
Release  
lever  
1. Align the 3 guide pins of the battery pack with  
the guide holes on the battery holder, and push  
straight to insert the battery pack.  
The battery cannot be attached properly if the  
guide pins are not inserted straight.  
(Trimpack)  
● If the battery capacity is reduced by repeating incomplete  
recharging, or recharging without discharging, once discharge  
the battery pack completely, then recharge it to restore the  
battery capacity.  
● If the battery pack is recharged with its internal temperature  
raised immediately after use, recharging may not be  
performed completely.  
Release lever  
2. Slide the battery pack toward the side panel  
where the cassette cover is located until it clicks.  
Now the battery pack has been attached.  
LIGHT  
ON  
OFF  
MODE  
RM  
VTR  
INCOM  
MIC  
COUNTER  
CTL  
TC  
UB  
CARBON  
DYNAMIC  
INCOM  
MIC  
ON  
LEVEL  
CH-1  
CH-2  
FRONT  
REAR  
AUDIO INPUT  
OFF  
Detaching the Battery Pack  
CALL  
RM  
OFF  
DC IN  
/BATT.  
Side panel  
with display  
Ⅲ While pushing and holding the release lever, slide  
the battery pack toward the side panel where the  
LCD display is located, then pull the battery pack  
outward to remove.  
POWER  
Battery  
39  
40  
5. PREPARATIONS  
5. PREPARATIONS  
5-1 Turning the Power ON  
5-2 Cassette Loading and Unloading  
Cassette rear switch  
EJECT  
MODE  
switch  
AUTO IRIS  
FULL AUTO BLACK  
LOLUX  
Videocassette  
LOG  
REW  
STOP  
FF  
PLAY  
STILL  
BACK  
NORMAL  
SPOT  
L
STRETCH  
EJECT switch  
NORMAL  
COMPRESS  
OPERATE/WARNING  
RESET  
L
LIGHT  
ON  
OFF  
MODE  
RM  
VTR  
MONITOR  
SELECT  
INCOM  
MIC  
COUNTER  
CTL  
TC  
UB  
FILTER  
3200k  
5600k+1/8ND  
5600k+1/64ND  
CH-1  
CARBON  
DYNAMIC  
ALARM  
MIX  
CH-2  
1
2
3
INCOM  
MIC  
ON  
LEVEL  
SHUTTER STATUS  
MENU  
MONITOR  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
AUTO  
FRONT  
REAR  
MANUAL  
AUDIO SELECT  
AUDIO INPUT  
OFF  
CH-1 AUDIO CH-2  
LEVEL  
CALL  
AUTO IRIS  
F
U
L
L
A
U
T
O
B
L
A
C
K
LOLUX  
BACK  
NORMAL  
SPOT  
L
STRETCH  
RM  
OFF  
DC IN  
/BATT.  
NORMAL  
COMPRESS  
L
POWER  
OPERATE  
NG  
NG  
OPERATE  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
OPERATE  
NG  
ON  
OFF  
1. POWER switch  
FULL AUTO  
lamp  
2. OPERATE switch  
3. VTR switch  
Cassette cover  
OPERATE switch  
VTR switch  
• A cassette cannot be loaded or unloaded while the GY-DV550 is in OPERATE OFF mode.  
• Use a videocassette tape marked MiniDV.  
• The videocassette should be held vertical and inserted straight into the slot.  
1. Select the power supplying method to the unit with the POWER switch.  
•
•
When supplying power to the unit from the DC IN connector or battery, set the POWER switch to DC IN/BATT.  
When supplying power to the unit from camera control unit through the VTR/RM multi-pin connector, set the switch to RM.  
Memo:  
CAUTION:  
Loading the Cassette  
It is not possible to supply power to the main unit from an external VCR through the VTR/RM multi-pin connector.  
When the POWER switch is set to RM, power supply other than the camera will no turn on during the following conditions. At  
this time, the FULL AUTO lamp will flash.  
When the MODE switch is set to VTR.  
When the MODE switch is set to RM and remote control signals are not being received from the camera control unit.  
The GY-DV550 cannot be operated while the cassette cover  
is open. Make sure to close the cover before operating the  
unit.  
1. Set the OPERATE switch to ON.  
•
•
2. Slide the EJECT switch to the side to open the cassette  
cover.  
3. Insert a videocassette into the cassette slot after removing  
Unloading the Cassette  
1. Set the OPERATE switch to ON.  
the tape slack.  
2. Turn the OPERATE switch to ON.  
Ensure that the videocassette is fully inserted.  
Ⅲ The power is then supplied to the unit.  
•
•
Video image is output to the viewfinder.  
The display of the VCR section is turned on.  
The cassette indicator on the display blinks  
during tape loading and lights steadily after  
the loading has been completed.  
2. Slide the EJECT switch all the way to the side to start tape  
ejection.  
3. Select the GY-DV550 operation mode with the VTR switch.  
The cassette indicator on the display blinks  
during tape ejection and turns off after the  
ejection has been completed.  
•
The GY-DV550 operation mode may differ when the power is turned ON and when the cassette is loaded depending on the  
setting of the VTR switch as follows:  
4. Slowly close the cassette cover by pushing it in all the way.  
When the cassette cover is closed, the OPERATE LED lights  
up green and the unit is in the condition where it can be  
operated. In the SAVE mode, the OPERATE LED lights  
orange.  
• It takes a few seconds before the cassette is ejected after  
the EJECT switch is moved.  
VTR switch setting  
GY-DV550 operation mode  
GY-DV550 enters the SAVE mode (tape protect mode) and stops the drum motor. "SAVE" is  
displayed in theVCR operation indicating section of the Status 1 mode screen in the viewfinder.  
In this mode, the tape is effectively protected.  
In this condition, press the VTR trigger button to start recording. However, it takes longer for  
the operation to take place from this condition than from the STBY mode.  
•
The condition at the completion of loading varies depending  
on the position of the VTR switch and the switch on the back  
of the videocassette as shown below.  
SAVE  
STBY  
3. Take out the videocassette.  
4. Close the cassette cover.  
Switch on Back of Videocassette  
VTR switch  
REC  
SAVE  
CAUTION:  
When a recordable videocassette is loaded, the GY-DV550 enters the record-pause mode  
automatically. (The drum motor is still rotating.)  
Enters record-  
pause mode after  
back-spacing.  
STBY  
The unit enters  
stop mode.  
“REC INH” is  
displayed for a few  
seconds on the  
counter display.  
Do not leave the unit for a long period with the cassette  
cover open as dirt or other foreign objects may enter the  
VCR section and cause malfunction.  
"STBY" is displayed on the Status 1 screen in the viewfinder.  
In this condition, pressing the VTR trigger button starts recording immediately.  
In the record-pause  
mode and the drum  
rotation is stopped.  
SAVE  
CAUTION:  
* Recording can be started by pressing theVTR trigger button  
from the record-pause condition.For details on how to record,  
see page 53.  
•
•
Wait at least 5 seconds before turning the OPERATE ON again once it has been turned OFF.  
When the OPERATE is turned OFF, the unit automatically enters the tape protect mode. It takes approximately 5 seconds to  
enter the tape protect mode. Do not turn the OPERATE ON again within this interval.  
External VCR will not enter the SAVE mode.  
•
•
After the cassette cover is closed, it takes about 8 seconds  
before the unit can start recording or before it enters the  
stop mode.  
Do not directly turn the POWER switch to OFF with a tape inserted. (The unit will not enter the tape protect mode.)  
41  
42  
5. PREPARATIONS  
6. SETTING AND ADJUSTMENTS BEFORE SHOOTING  
5-3 Setting the Date and Time  
6-1 Camera Settings  
The date and time of the built-in clock should be set. Powered by the backup lithium battery, the set date and time data continue to  
count even when the power is switched off. Whether to display the set date and time data on the viewfinder and whether to record  
the data on the sub-time code area of the tape during recording can be set in DISPLAY item of the Camera TIME DATE menu  
screen.  
1. POWER ON  
3.  
1First place a charged battery pack in the battery case on  
the rear section of the unit. If battery pack is not used,  
OPERATE/WARNING  
LIGHT  
MODE  
RM  
VTR  
RESET  
ON  
OFF  
connect DC power to the DC INPUT connector on the  
rear section of the unit using the AC power adapter (AA-  
P250) to supply DC 12 V current.  
MONITOR  
INCOM  
MIC  
SELECT  
COUNTER  
CTL  
TC  
UB  
FILTER  
3200k  
5600k+1/8ND  
5600k+1/64ND  
CH-1  
MIX  
CH-2  
CARBON  
DYNAMIC  
ALARM  
1
2
3
INCOM  
MIC  
ON  
LEVEL  
SHUTTER STATUS  
MENU  
MONITOR  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
AUTO  
FRONT  
REAR  
MANUAL  
AUDIO SELECT  
AUDIO INPUT  
OFF  
CH-1 AUDIO CH-2  
LEVEL  
CALL  
AUDIO  
LEVEL  
AUTO IRIS  
F
U
L
L
A
U
T
O
B
L
A
C
K
LOLUX  
CH-1  
CH-2  
BACK  
NORMAL  
SPOT  
L
STRETCH  
RM  
OFF  
DC IN  
/BATT.  
NORMAL  
COMPRESS  
L
2Set the OPERATE switch on the unit to ON.  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
AUTO  
FRONT  
REAR  
OPERATE/WARNING  
POWER  
LIGHT  
ON  
OFF  
MANUAL  
CH  
CH  
1
2
OVER AUTO OFF DEW  
dB  
MODE  
RM  
VTR  
RESET  
4
0
3
0
20  
10  
0
O
V
E
R
S
E
R
V
O
R
F
L
i
NG  
OPERATE  
AUDIO SELECT  
VTR SELECT TC GENE.  
AUDIO INPUT  
32k  
48k  
SLAVE  
PB  
NDF  
HOLD  
ON  
OFF  
AUD LOCK SP  
MONITOR  
2. SWITCH positions  
INCOM  
MIC  
2.  
WIDE  
SELECT  
MENU  
COUNTER  
CTL  
TC  
UB  
H
M
S
F
CH-1  
MIX  
CH-2  
REMAIN  
E
BATT  
F
CARBON  
DYNAMIC  
R
E
V
F
W
D
SEE  
CONTINUE  
REC  
FREE  
MENU  
H
M
INSTR-  
UCTION  
MANUAL  
COUNTER  
switch  
INT  
PRST  
A. Set the VTR switch to STBY.  
PARA  
EXT  
INCOM  
REGEN  
MIC  
ON  
LEVEL  
LITHIUM BATT.  
B. AUTO IRIS switch; set to NORMAL.  
C. GAIN switch; set to L. The L position is 0 dB.  
D. OUTPUT switch; set to CAM\AUTO KNEE OFF.  
E. WHT. BAL (Auto White Balance) switch; set to A or B.  
GROUP  
HOLD  
ITEM  
SHIFT  
SELECT  
ADVANCE PRESET  
DATA SET  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
1.  
AO  
FRONT  
REAR  
CAM AUX  
MAL  
AUDIO LECT  
AUDIO INPUT  
OFF  
AUDIO  
LEVEL  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CALL  
2.  
1.  
VTR INPUT  
I
/BATT
AUTO IRIS  
FULL AUTO BLACK  
LOLUX  
CALL  
RM  
BACK  
NORMAL  
SPOT  
L
STRETCH  
POWER  
3. HOLD  
button  
NORMAL  
COMPRESS  
OFF  
DC IN  
/BATT.  
L
5. PRESET button  
4. ADVANCE button  
F
3. Set the lens' iris mode switch to "A" (AUTO IRIS side)  
4. Choose the proper color temperature conversion filter.  
4. SHIFT button  
Lithium battery compartment  
POWER  
Ⅲ Check that the lithium battery has been inserted.  
FILTER  
3200K  
Suitable Location  
Indoors, dark outdoors  
Outdoors  
1. Turn ON the power and set the counter display to the date/  
B
A
C
D
E
time mode.  
1
2
3
•
Set theVCR Setup Menu item No.516 DISPLAY SELECT  
to “CLOCK” and then press the DATA SET button.  
ꢀ See “Displaying and Setting VCR Setup Menus” on  
page 73.  
5600K+1/8ND  
5600K+1/64ND  
Time display (COUNTER switch: TC)  
Hour Min. Sec.  
Outdoors under clear sky  
ꢀ See “VCR Setup Menu Contents” on page 75.  
5. Using the SHUTTER dial, set the shutter speed to OFF.  
2. Set the COUNTER switch to TC or UB.  
Ⅲ To set the time: Set the switch to TC.  
The time (Hour, Min., Sec.) is indicated on the counter  
display. (24-hour clock system)  
Ⅲ To set the date: Set the switch to UB.  
HOLD  
VF  
4.  
5.  
H
H
H
M
M
M
S
S
S
HOLD  
The date (Month, Day, Year) (U MODEL)/(Day, Month,  
Year) (E MODEL) is indicated on the counter display.  
OFF ZEBRA  
SKIN  
AREA  
AUTO  
WHITE  
ON  
ACCU  
FOCUS  
3. Press the HOLD button to enter the setting mode.  
The “HOLD” indicator lights up on the display to indicate  
that the unit is in the setting mode.  
VTR  
AUDIO  
TAKE  
LEVEL CH-1  
The leftmost digit on the counter blinks.  
4. Set the date and time.  
•
•
Each time the ADVANCE button is pressed, the value of  
the blinking digit increases.  
Each time the SHIFT button is pressed, the digit to the  
right of the currently blinking one starts blinking. When  
pressed while the rightmost digit is blinking, the leftmost  
digit starts blinking again.  
(U MODEL)  
Date display (COUNTER switch: UB)  
(E MODEL)  
Date display (COUNTER switch: UB)  
6-2 Screen Size (4:3/16:9 aspect ratio) Mode Selection  
Month Day Year  
Day Month Year  
Repeat the above procedure to set the value of all the  
digits.  
The screen size of recorded images can be selected in ASPECT  
RATIO item of the Camera OPERATION menu screen. ꢀ See  
page 79  
Memo:  
HOLD  
HOLD  
•
The safety zone of the standard screen or 16:9 screen  
can be displayed on the viewfinder by setting SAFETY  
ZONE item of the CameraVF DISPLAY menu screen.  
ꢀ See page 78.  
5. To decide the set date and time data, press the PRESET  
button.  
● To record using the standard screen, set ASPECT RATIO to  
The “HOLD” indicator on the display turns off and the date/  
time display stops blinking.  
The time starts counting.  
Ⅲ When setting DISPLAY item of the Camera TIME DATE  
menu screen to ON, the date and time data are displayed  
on the viewfinder. In addition, the time and date data are  
recorded on the tape during recording. The viewfinder  
display format can be selected in the CameraTIME DATE  
menu screen.  
HOLD  
HOLD  
4:3.  
•
When setting ASPECT RATIO to LETTER, 16:9  
screen detection ID signal will not be outputted from  
the Y/C OUT connector.  
● When setting ASPECT RATIO to LETTER, images are  
recorded on a screen of 16:9 aspect ratio split horizontally.  
In this case, the viewfinder screen will show a 16:9 screen  
that is horizontally split.  
ꢀ See “Time/Date Display” on page 30.  
ꢀ See “TIME DATE screen” on page 84.  
Memo:  
To display and set the time code or user’s bit, set the VCR  
Setup Menu item No. 516 DISPLAY SELECT to “TC”.  
43  
44  
6. SETTING AND ADJUSTMENTS BEFORE SHOOTING  
6. SETTING AND ADJUSTMENTS BEFORE SHOOTING  
6-3 Viewfinder Adjustment  
6-5 Back Focus Adjustment  
It is only necessary to perform this when the lens is attached  
1. Adjust the position and angle of the viewfinder.  
2. Diopter adjustment  
Rotate the eyepiece focusing ring until the viewfinder screen  
image is clearly visible.  
1.  
for the first time or when focusing is not correct in both the  
telephoto and wide-angle positions. Adjust the viewfinder for  
sharpness first.  
3. 4.6. 5.  
Eyepiece  
1.  
It is easier to adjust back focus when the subject is more  
than 3 meters from the camera.  
The optimal subject for this adjustment is a Siemens star  
chart.  
3. Brightness and contrast adjustment  
When the ambient brightness changes, etc., the brightness  
and contrast of the viewfinder screen can be adjusted with  
the BRIGHT and CONT controls.  
2.  
Eyepiece  
focusing ring  
1.  
Memo:  
RET  
M
A
1. Set the IRIS mode switch to M (Manual).  
2. Set the zoom mode to MANU (Manual).  
The screen size of the viewfinder can be changed by  
selecting ASPECT RATIO (4:3 or 16:9 aspect ratio  
screen) in the OPERATION MENU screen.  
W
T
3.  
3.  
CONT  
BRIGHT  
3. Open the iris ring. If the illumination is too strong, reduce it  
or move to a darker place.  
1.  
6-4 External Monitor Adjustment  
4. Turn the zoom lever until the lens is at the maximum  
telephoto position.  
Display the camera built-in color bar signal on the video monitor  
and adjust the colors, contrast and brightness.  
PUSH  
5. Bring the subject into focus.  
1. Connect a color video monitor to the MONITOR OUT  
6. Set the lens to maximum wide-angle.  
7. Loosen the back focus ring retaining knob.  
connector of the GY-DV550.  
DV CAMCORDER  
VTR/RM  
GY-DV550  
1.  
2. Set the OUTPUT switch to BARS to output the color bar  
signal (SMTPE (U MODEL)/EBU (E MODEL) type color  
bars).  
8. View the same subject and adjust the back focus ring for  
the best possible focus.  
2. 7.8.10.  
PROMPTER  
OUTPUT  
CLH-I1NE OUT  
Y/C OUT MONITOR OUT  
CH-2  
9. Repeat steps 4. through 8. about three times for fine  
adjustment until the subject remains in focus in both the  
telephoto position and the wide-angle position.  
REMOTE  
3
I
.
Set the monitor's BLUE CHECK function to ON so that the  
screen turns entirely blue.  
TC IN  
TC OUT  
3.~8.  
4. Adjust the CHROMA control of the monitor so that there is  
no difference in brightness between the color bars 1and  
8, 7and D.  
10.Tighten the back focus ring retaining knob to secure the  
ring.  
2.  
NORMAL  
SPOT  
NORMAL  
COMPRESS  
L
Memo:  
5. With the BLUE CHECK function ON, adjust the PHASE  
control of the monitor so that there is no difference in  
brightness between the color bars 3and 0, 5and B.  
ACCU FOCUS can also be used in the above step 3.  
OPERATE  
NG  
ON  
OFF  
6. If the phase control adjustment above causes a difference  
in brightness between the color bars 1and 8, 7and D,  
start again from the CHROMA control adjustment in step 4.  
7. Set the monitor's BLUE CHECK function to OFF to switch  
the monitor back to the standard screen (R, G and B will all  
appear).  
Siemens star chart  
Ⅲ SMTPE type color bars (U MODEL)  
8. Use the monitor's brightness control to adjust so that the  
color bars Hand Idisappear but Jis visible.  
Ⅲ SMTPE type color bars (E MODEL)  
White Yellow Cyan  
Green Magenta  
Red  
Blue  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7  
Blue  
Black Magenta Black  
Cyan  
Black  
White  
8 9 0 A B C D  
Black  
White  
Black  
E F G  
HIJ K  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  
The color bar screen has a configuration as shown above.  
The description hereinafter refers to the positions in the color bar  
screen using the numbers.  
The colour bar screen has a configuration as shown above.  
The description hereinafter refers to the positions in the colour bar  
screen using the numbers.  
45  
46  
6. SETTING AND ADJUSTMENTS BEFORE SHOOTING  
6. SETTING AND ADJUSTMENTS BEFORE SHOOTING  
6-6 White Balance Adjustment  
6-7 Mixing Characters to MONITOR OUT  
Since the color of light (color temperature) varies depending on the light source, it is necessary to re-adjust the white balance when  
the main light source illuminating the subject changes.  
Note:  
When a subject illuminated by a halogen lamp with a color temperature of 3,200K is shot while the color temperature conversion  
filter setting is set to 5,600K + ND, a proper white balance adjustment and (FAW) Full Time Auto White balance may not be  
accomplishable. In this case, change the color temperature conversion filter setting to 3,200K and then carry out the white  
balance adjustment and (FAW) again.  
PUSH  
When mixing characters in the MONITOR OUT connector video,  
set CHARACTER in the Camera SETUP MENU screen to ON.  
ꢀ See page 83  
Various characters (status screen display) are displayed by  
superposing the camera or external input images.  
DV CAMCORDER  
GY-DV550  
VTR/RM  
● Do not adjust using any highly reflective objects, such as metal, etc., as this may result in improper white balance adjustment.  
Memo:  
•
WHITE BALANCE ADJUSTMENT  
PROMPTER  
OUTPUT  
Color signals are not included in the return video  
signals of the external VCR connected to the VTR/  
RM multi-pin connector.  
When setting CHARACTER MIX to OFF, characters  
will not be displayed on the images from the  
MONITOR OUT connector.  
Two kinds of white balance adjustment results can be stored in  
GENLOCK/AUX IN  
VIDEO OUT  
CLH-I1NE OUT  
CH-2  
Y/C OUT MONITOR OUT  
memories AUTO1 and AUTO2.  
2.  
FILTER knob  
REMOTE  
AUDIO IN  
FRONT  
TC IN  
TC OUT  
LENS  
Ⅲ Adjustment procedure  
•
1. Set the following switches.  
MONITOR OUT  
• Set the OPERATE switch to ON.  
1.  
IRIS mode  
switch  
• Set the OUTPUT switch to CAM-AUTO KNEE OFF.  
• Set the IRIS mode switch of the lens to A (Auto).  
E-E images/playback image are outputted as monitor  
output (composite video signals).  
2. Set the FILTER knob according to the current lighting.  
3. Set the WHT.BAL switch to A or B.  
4. Place a white object near the centre of the screen under  
the same lighting conditions as the target subject and zoom  
in to fill the screen with white.  
3.  
1. OUTPUT switch  
1. POWER switch  
WHT.BAL switch  
Color video monitor  
5.  
AUTO WHT.  
/ACCU FOCUS switch  
5. Tilt the AUTOWHT./ACCU FOCUS switch upward (to AUTO  
WHITE) once and release it.  
"AUTO WHITE A, B OPERATION" is displayed in the  
viewfinder while the auto white balance adjustment circuit  
operates.  
When the white balance has been adjusted correctly, the  
approximate color temperature is displayed together with  
“AUTO WHITE A, B OK” for about 5 seconds.  
Auto  
White  
Area  
AUTO WH  
OPERA T  
I
I
T E  
ON  
A
AUTO WH  
OK  
I
T E  
A
< 3 2 0 0 K >  
During operation  
Result message  
Error messages  
If the adjustment ends abnormally, an error message, as  
described below, blinks for about 5 seconds.  
AUTO WH  
ERROR LOW  
I
T E  
A
AUTO WH  
I
T E  
A
•
NG: OBJECT (Improper object)  
:
L
I
GHT  
NG : OB J ECT  
Displayed when there is not enough white color on an object  
or the color temperature is not suitable.  
Improper object  
Insufficient illumination  
Replace the color temperature conversion filter or use another  
white object and re-adjust the white balance.  
•
•
ERROR: LOW LIGHT (Insufficient illumination)  
AUTO WH  
I
T E  
L
A
Displayed when the illumination is dim. Increase the  
illumination and then re-adjust the white balance.  
ERROR OVER  
:
I
GHT  
ERROR: OVER LIGHT (Excessive illumination)  
Displayed when the light is excessively bright. Decrease the  
illumination and then re-adjust the white balance.  
Excessive illumination  
FULL-TIME AUTOWHITE BALANCE (FAW)  
The FAW function adjusts the white balance value  
automatically as the lighting condition changes.  
CAUTION:  
•
The FAW (Full-time AutoWhite balance) function cannot  
provide optimum white balance with a subject outside  
the FAW adjustment range, for example when it contains  
only a single color or not enough white color.  
The accuracy of the FAW (Full-time Auto White balance)  
is inferior to that of the manual white balance.  
When the power is turned on with the FAW mode  
selected, it takes about 10 seconds for the FAW  
adjustment to be completed. Do not shoot within this  
interval.  
This mode is convenient when you have no time to adjust the  
white balance or when the camera is moved frequently in and  
out of places under different lighting conditions.  
•
•
Ⅲ Setting procedure  
The FAW function can be activated with item "FAW" on the  
OPERATION MENU.  
This item allows allocation of the FAW function to one of the  
WHT.BAL switch positions, A, B or PRESET.  
ꢀ See "OPERATION SCREEN" on page 79.  
47  
48  
6. SETTING AND ADJUSTMENTS BEFORE SHOOTING  
6. SETTING AND ADJUSTMENTS BEFORE SHOOTING  
6-8 Switch Settings of the VCR Section  
6-9 Audio Input Signal Selection  
TC GENE switch  
OPERATE/WARNING  
LIGHT  
MODE  
RM  
VTR  
RESET  
ON  
OPERATE/WARNING  
OFF  
AUDIO  
LEVEL  
LIGHT  
ON  
OFF  
CH-1  
CH-2  
MODE  
RM  
VTR  
RESET  
MONITOR  
VF  
INCOM  
MIC  
SELECT  
COUNTER  
CTL  
TC  
UB  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
FILTER  
3200k  
5600k+1/8ND  
5600k+1/64ND  
CH-1  
CARBON  
DYNAMIC  
ALARM  
MIX  
CH-2  
MONITOR  
1
2
3
INCOM  
MIC  
SELECT  
COUNTER  
CTL  
TC  
UB  
AUTO  
FRONT  
REAR  
FILTER  
3200k  
CH-1  
CARBON  
DYNAMIC  
ALARM  
MIX  
CH-2  
1
2
3
MANUAL  
INCOM  
5600k+1/8ND  
5600k+1/64ND  
MIC  
ON  
LEVEL  
SHUTTER STATUS  
MENU  
MONITOR  
INCOM  
AUDIO SELECT  
VTR SELECT TC GENE.  
AUDIO INPUT  
MIC  
ON  
LEVEL  
SHUTTER STATUS  
MENU  
MONITOR  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
AUTO  
FRONT  
REAR  
MANUAL  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
AUDIO SELECT  
AUDIO INPUT  
OFF  
AUTO  
FRONT  
REAR  
AUDIO IN  
REAR  
LINE/MIC  
switch  
AUDIO IN  
FRONT  
LINE/MIC  
switch  
MANUAL  
SEE  
CONTINUE  
REC  
FREE  
MENU  
CH-1 AUDIO CH-2  
LEVEL  
AUDIO SELECT  
AUDIO INPUT  
CALL  
OFF  
INSTR-  
UCTION  
MANUAL  
INT  
AUTO IRIS  
F
U
L
L
A
U
T
O
B
L
A
C
K
LOLUX  
CH-1 AUDIO CH-2  
LEVEL  
PRST  
REGEN  
PARA  
EXT  
BACK  
NORMAL  
SPOT  
L
STRETCH  
RM  
OFF  
DC IN  
/BATT.  
AUTO IRIS  
F
U
L
L
A
U
T
O
B
L
A
C
K
LOLUX  
NORMAL  
COMPRESS  
L
BACK  
NORMAL  
SPOT  
L
STRETCH  
RM  
OFF  
DC IN  
/BATT.  
NORMAL  
COMPRESS  
L
LITHIUM BATT.  
GROUP  
HOLD  
ITEM  
SHIFT  
SELECT  
ADVANCE PRESET  
DATA SET  
POWER  
CAM AUX  
POWER  
D
V
L
I
N
E
MIC  
+48V  
ON  
LINE  
MIC  
+48V  
ON  
INTERCOM  
OFF ZEBRA  
SKIN  
AREA  
NG  
OPERATE  
AUTO  
WHITE  
ON  
F
DC INPUT  
EARPHONE  
ON  
OFF  
NG  
OPERATE  
AUDIO IN  
ACCU  
FOCUS  
ON  
OFF  
DC  
OUTPUT  
VTR INPUT  
VTR  
AUDIO  
TAKE  
LEVEL CH-1  
VTR SELECT switch  
VTR INPUT switch  
AUDIO IN FRONT  
connector  
AUDIO  
IN REAR  
connector  
CH-1 AUDIO  
INPUT switch  
CH-2 AUDIO  
INPUT switch  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
AUTO  
FRONT  
REAR  
Ⅲ Selecting the video input signals  
● SAMPLING RATE  
MANUAL  
AUDIO SELECT  
AUDIO INPUT  
Select the sampling rate for audio recording (48 kHz or 32  
kHz).  
Video signals recorded on this unit is selected using theVTR  
INPUT switch.  
AUDIO  
LEVEL  
CH-1  
CH-2  
•
•
When recording camera images, set to CAM.  
When recording composite video signals from the  
GENLOCK/AUX IN connector, set to AUX.  
● CH1 FRONT VR ENABLE  
Set whether or not the front section's audio volume control  
should be used.The front section's audio volume control only  
affects the CH1 audio channel.  
ꢀ See “Recording External Video Signals” on page 57  
The GY-DV550 is provided with the AUDIO INPUT connector  
on the front section and the AUDIO INPUT connectors at the  
rear section for audio input.  
Two channels of sound can be recorded on the tape in digital  
PCM format.  
Using the AUDIO INPUT switch, select for each channel (CH1  
and CH2) whether the sound to be recorded should be the  
sound from the AUDIO INPUT connector on the front section  
or the sound from the AUDIO INPUT connectors on the rear  
section.  
Ⅲ Selection of front audio input and rear audio input  
connectors  
Ⅲ Selecting the VCR to record  
● AUDIO REF. SIGNAL LEVEL  
The reference recording level to the tape is selected (-20dB  
or -12dB  
Whether to record using this unit or the external VCR  
connected to the VTR/RM multi-pin connector is selected  
using the VTR SELECT switch.  
Select the audio signal input to the AUDIO IN FRONT and  
AUDIO IN REAR connector using the [LINE/MIC] switch.  
Make settings for the AUDIO IN FRONT and AUDIO IN  
REAR connectors separately.  
● LONG PAUSE TIME  
•
•
When recording with this unit only, set to INT.  
When recording with an externalVCR, set to EXT or PARA.  
ꢀ See “Recording with an external VCR” on page 58  
Select the time (in minutes) until the GY-DV550 enters the  
tape protection mode (drum rotation stops) when the record-  
pause mode is continued for long time.  
LINE  
: Set to this position when connected to audio  
equipment, etc.  
Ⅲ Audio input signal selection  
● SSF MODE  
The reference input level is +4 dBs.  
Use the AUDIO INPUT switch to select whether the sound  
recorded on audio channel 1 or 2 is the sound from the AUDIO  
INPUT connector on the front section or the sound from the  
AUDIO INPUT connector on the rear section.  
ꢀ See page 50.  
Select the mode of the S.S.F.(Super Scene Finder) function.  
S.S.F. function: Stores the time code of desired scenes or  
cue points in the unit's memory.  
MIC  
:
Set to this position when using a monaural  
microphone.  
Ⅲ Selecting the CH-1 channel input sound  
The reference input level is -60 dBs.  
Make the selection using the CH-1 AUDIO INPUT switch.  
FRONT : The sound from the AUDIO INPUT connector on  
the front section is recorded on the CH-1 channel.  
REAR : The sound from the AUDIO INPUT connector on  
the rear section is recorded on the CH-1 channel.  
ꢀ See “S.S.F. function” on page 66.  
MIC +48 V : Set to this position when a microphone  
(phantom microphone) requiring +48 V DC  
power supply is connected.  
● DISPLAY SELECT  
Select the counter display (time code or date/time indication)  
when the COUNTER switch is set to “TC” or “UB”.  
Ⅲ Audio recording level adjustment selection  
Select "AUTO" or "MANUAL" for the recording level  
adjustment mode for each audio channel.  
ꢀ See page 51.  
Ⅲ Setting the time code recording function  
CAUTION:  
Ⅲ Selecting the CH-2 channel input sound  
The GY-DV550 records SMPTE-standard (U MODEL)/EBU-  
standard (E MODEL) time code during recording.Set the switch-  
es according to applications.  
When connecting a component that does not require  
+48 V power supply, make sure that the LINE/MIC switch  
is not set to MIC +48V.  
Neglecting this could cause damage to the connected  
component.  
Make the selection using the CH-2 AUDIO INPUT switch.  
FRONT : The sound from the AUDIO INPUT connector on  
the front section is recorded on the CH-2 channel.  
REAR : The sound from the AUDIO INPUT connector on  
the rear section is recorded on the CH-2 channel.  
Ⅲ VCR Setup Menu setting  
● REMOTE SELECT  
Confirm that "LOCAL" is selected if you want to operate on  
the GY-DV550 only.  
● To record a time code as set in the built-in time code gener-  
ator:  
• Set the TC GENE switch to REC.  
● BACK TALLY MODE  
Select the lightning pattern of the BACK TALLY lamp.  
This position allows you to record continuous time codes  
when recording scenes one after another.  
• VCR Setup Menu setting (U MODEL)  
Select the time code generator’s framing mode as drop  
frame or non-drop using theVCR Setup Menu item No. 416  
“MON DROP/DROP”.  
● INPUT SELECT  
Select the input video signal (camera images or DV terminal  
images). To record the GY-DV550’s camera image, set to  
“CAMERA”.  
● LOW CUT IN  
● To record a time code in continuation of the existing time  
code on the tape:  
• Set the TC GENE switch to REGEN.  
• Set the VCR Setup Menu item No. 302 BACK SPACE to  
“STANDARD”.  
For each audio input connector, select whether or not the  
lower frequency components of the audio signal are cut.  
Set to this position to eliminate the wind noise of the  
microphone.  
For details on the time code operations including time code  
presetting, see "TIME CODE OPERATION" on page 62.  
49  
50  
6. SETTING AND ADJUSTMENTS BEFORE SHOOTING  
6. SETTING AND ADJUSTMENTS BEFORE SHOOTING  
6-11 Monitoring Audio during Recording  
6-10 Audio Input Level Adjustment  
CH-1 Audio  
select switch  
CH-2 Audio  
select switch  
OPERATE/WARNING  
LIGHT  
ON  
OFF  
MODE  
RM  
VTR  
RESET  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
MONITOR  
VF  
INCOM  
MIC  
SELECT  
COUNTER  
CTL  
TC  
UB  
AUTO  
FRONT  
REAR  
FILTER  
3200k  
5600k+1/8ND  
5600k+1/64ND  
CH-1  
MIX  
CH-2  
CARBON  
DYNAMIC  
ALARM  
MANUAL  
1
2
3
OPERATE/WARNING  
AUDIO SELECT  
AUDIO INPUT  
LIGHT  
INCOM  
MODE  
RM  
VTR  
MIC  
ON  
RESET  
ON  
LEVEL  
SHUTTER STATUS  
MENU  
MONITOR  
OFF  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
AUDIO  
LEVEL  
CH-1  
CH-2  
AUTO  
FRONT  
REAR  
MONITOR  
SELECT  
CH-1  
MIX  
CH-2  
MANUAL  
INCOM  
MIC  
AUDIO SELECT  
AUDIO INPUT  
COUNTER  
CTL  
TC  
UB  
OFF  
FILTER  
3200k  
5600k+1/8ND  
5600k+1/64ND  
CARBON  
DYNAMIC  
CH-1 AUDIO CH-2  
LEVEL  
ALARM  
1
2
3
CALL  
AUTO IRIS  
F
U
L
L
A
U
T
O
B
L
A
C
K
LOLUX  
BACK  
NORMAL  
SPOT  
L
STRETCH  
RM  
OFF  
DC IN  
/BATT.  
NORMAL  
COMPRESS  
L
INCOM  
MIC  
ON  
LEVEL  
SHUTTER STATUS  
MENU  
MONITOR  
POWER  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
AUTO  
FRONT  
REAR  
MANUAL  
OFF ZEBRA  
SKIN  
AREA  
AUDIO SELECT  
AUDIO INPUT  
NG  
OPERATE  
OFF  
AUTO  
ON  
WHITE  
ON  
OFF  
AUDIO  
LEVEL  
CH-1  
CH-2  
ACCU  
FOCUS  
CALL  
AUTO IRIS  
FULL AUTO BLACK  
LOLUX  
VTR  
AUDIO  
TAKE  
LEVEL CH-1  
BACK  
NORMAL  
SPOT  
L
STRETCH  
RM  
OFF  
DC IN  
/BATT.  
NORMAL  
COMPRESS  
L
POWER  
CH-1 audio input level control  
CH-2 audio input level control  
NG  
OPERATE  
CH-1 audio input level control  
ON  
OFF  
EARPHONE  
jack  
For each audio channel, use the AUDIO SELECT switches to  
select whether the audio input level adjustment should be set  
to AUTO mode or MANUAL mode.  
Ⅲ How to use the audio input level control  
on the front section  
ALARM  
control  
MONITOR  
control  
MONITOR SELECT  
switch  
Monitoring  
loudspeaker  
1
2
3
Set the audio input level control on the front section to  
maximum (10) position.  
•
When set to AUTO:Audio input level is fixed.In this mode,  
the audio input level control does not  
function.  
Initially, adjust the audio input level using the CH1 recording  
level control on the side.  
•
When set to MANUAL:Audio input level can be adjusted  
using the audio input level controls  
for each audio input.  
The audio input during recording, in record-pause or stop mode  
can be monitored through the monitoring loudspeaker or  
earphone.  
When a loud sound is input during recording, use the audio  
input level control on the front section to lower the audio  
input level.  
Memo:  
The reference level for audio input to tape can be set in  
VTR Setup menu No. 257 AUDIO REF. SIGNAL LEVEL  
(-20dB or -12dB). The level will change for both CH1  
and CH2.  
•
The monitoring audio is not output from the loudspeaker while  
the EARPHONE jack is in use.  
Level meter  
•
Select the audio channel to be monitored using the  
MONITOR SELECT switch.  
CH-1 : The sound input to the CH-1 channel is output.  
MIX : The sound input to the CH1 and CH2 channels is  
output mixed.  
OVER  
dB  
OVER  
CH 1  
AUTO OFF DEW  
SERVO RF L i  
40 30  
20  
10  
0
Ⅲ Adjusting the audio input level control of the front section  
CH 2  
The audio input level control on the front section only affects  
the CH-1 channel sound.  
To use the audio input level control on the front section,  
make the following settings.  
32k  
48k  
SLAVE  
PB  
NDF  
HOLD  
SP  
WIDE  
AUD LOCK  
MENU  
CH-2 : The sound input to the CH-2 channel is output.  
H
M
S
F
E
BATT  
F
REMAIN  
REV FWD  
•
•
The MONITOR volume control adjusts the monitoring  
volume.  
H
M
•
•
Set the CH-1 AUDIO SELECT switch to MANUAL.  
Set the VCR Setup Menu item No. 246 CH1 FRONT VR  
ENABLE to "ENABLE".  
The loudspeaker or earphone outputs an alarm tone in the  
case of an abnormal condition occurring in the unit.  
An alarm tone is also output when the tape end is reached  
or when the battery is running down.The alarm tone volume  
can be adjusted with the ALARM control. For details on the  
alarm tone, see page 97.  
Viewfinder Status 1 Mode  
ACCU - FOCUS  
CAUTION:  
The audio input level controls on the side section work  
regardless of the setting of the VCR Setup Menu item No.  
246 CH1 FRONT VR ENABLE.  
G
F
I
SD  
B
* Do not increase the audio monitoring volume  
excessively; otherwise howling with the camera  
microphone may occur.  
Manual Adjustment of Audio Input Level  
The audio input level can be adjusted manually when the GY-  
DV550 is in the record, record-pause or stop mode.  
CH1 -  
CH2 -  
-
-
-
-
<
-
-
- + -  
- + -  
6 0  
-
-
M : 099  
1 2 . 4V  
F5 . 6  
STBY  
Audio level  
1. Set the AUDIO SELECT switch of the channel whose audio  
Indicator level (reference)  
input level that you want to adjust manually to MANUAL.  
2. Rotate the audio input level control corresponding to the  
–38  
–32  
–26  
–20  
–14  
–8 –2dB  
audio input to be adjusted.  
•
Adjust so that the peak level does not exceed the -3dB  
point when a loud sound is input.  
CAUTION:  
When the AUDIO INPUT LINE/MIC switch on the rear  
section is set to MIC, be sure to check that the microphone  
is connected to the AUDIO IN FRONT or AUDIO INPUT  
REAR connector. If the microphone is not connected,  
increasing the audio input level could cause noise from  
the input connector to be recorded on the tape. When the  
microphone is not connected to the front AUDIO INPUT or  
rear AUDIO INPUT connector, set the LINE/MIC switch to  
LINE or turn down the audio input level control.  
51  
52  
For servicing  
The QUICK REC mode of this unit is different from conventional models such as GY-X1, GY-X2 and GY-X2B. It is not a  
fully automatic mode operation. In this case it is a function that shortens the time initial on the start of the recording.  
←
7. SHOOTING OPERATION  
7. SHOOTING OPERATION  
7-1 Basic Recording Operation  
7-1 Basic Recording Operation (Cont'd)  
8. Press the VTR trigger button on the GY-DV550 or lens to  
8. 9. 10.  
VTR Trigger button  
1. Set the POWER switch to DC IN/BATT and turn the  
1.  
“DEW”  
start recording.  
OPERATE switch to ON.  
Once recording has started, the BACK TALLY lamp on the  
rear section of the unit and the tally lamp on the viewfinder  
light red, and the REC indication in the viewfinder lights  
green.  
OVER  
dB  
CH 1  
AUTO OFF DEW  
SERVO RF L i  
40 30  
20  
10  
0
Power is supplied to the unit.  
OVER  
CH 2  
Check that the condensation indicator "DEW" does not  
appear on the display.If it is lit, wait until the indicator goes  
out.  
32k  
48k  
SP  
WIDE  
SLAVE  
PB  
M
NDF  
HOLD  
AUD LOCK  
MENU  
Note:  
H
S
F
3.  
* The lightning conditions of the BACK TALLY lamp on  
the rear section of the unit can be changed by setting  
theVCR Setup Menu item No.082 BACKTALLY MODE.  
* The lamp in the viewfinder and on the front section will  
blink from when the button is pressed and until recording  
actually starts.  
EJECT switch  
EJECT  
2. Set the VTR switch to the STBY position.  
Even when the VTR switch is set to the "SAVE" position,  
pressing the VTR trigger button will start recording.  
However, in this case, it is necessary to wait a short time  
until the recording actually starts.  
5.  
OPERATE/WARNING  
LIGHT  
MODE  
RM  
VTR  
RESET  
ON  
OFF  
9. To stop recording, press the VTR trigger button again. The  
TALLY lamp and REC indicator lamp go out and the unit  
enters the record-pause mode.  
When the VTR trigger button is pressed, the unit enters the  
record-pause mode after rewinding the tape for about 2  
seconds (back-spacing).  
MONITOR  
INCOM  
MIC  
SELECT  
COUNTER  
CTL  
TC  
UB  
FILTER  
3200k  
CH-1  
CARBON  
DYNAMIC  
ALARM  
MIX  
CH-2  
1
2
3
5600k+1/8ND  
5600k+1/64ND  
For details on the SAVE mode, see page 55.  
INCOM  
MIC  
ON  
LEVEL  
SHUTTER STATUS  
MENU  
MONITOR  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
AUTO  
FRONT  
REAR  
MANUAL  
8.  
AUDIO SELECT  
AUDIO INPUT  
OFF  
CH-1 AUDIO CH-2  
LEVEL  
CALL  
AUTO IRIS  
F
U
L
L
A
U
T
O
B
L
A
C
K
LOLUX  
BACK  
NORMAL  
SPOT  
L
STRETCH  
RM  
OFF  
DC IN  
/BATT.  
NORMAL  
COMPRESS  
L
POWER  
3. Slide the EJECT switch to open the cassette cover.  
ZEBRA  
SKIN  
AREA  
OFF  
NG  
OPERATE  
ON  
OFF  
AUTO  
WHITE  
•
•
Ensure that the switch on the back of the videocassette  
is set to REC and insert the cassette correctly.  
When the cassette is inserted, the tape is loaded and  
the unit enters the record-pause mode.  
ON  
ACCU  
FOCUS  
VTR  
AUDIO  
TAKE  
LEVEL CH-1  
10.To restart recording:  
1.  
Press the VTR trigger button on the GY-DV550 or lens.  
Slowly close the cassette cover.  
OFF ZEBRA  
SKIN  
AREA  
AUTO  
2.  
4.  
11.  
ON  
WHITE  
ACCU  
FOCUS  
11.Ending recording:  
VTR  
AUDIO  
TAKE  
LEVEL CH-1  
• Use a videocassette marked MiniDV.  
• If the cassette cover is not closed, the GY-DV550 will  
remain inoperative.  
• Following loading of the cassette and when the  
OPERATE switch is turned ON/OFF, the built-in head  
cleaner will emit a sound while operating. This does  
not indicate a malfunction.  
• After the cassette cover is closed, it takes about 8  
seconds before the unit is ready for recording.  
Enter record-pause mode and perform the following  
operations as required.  
8. 9. 10.  
VTR Trigger button  
Ⅲ When it is required to unload the videocassette:  
6.  
OPERATE  
NG  
•
Slide the EJECT switch.  
ON  
OFF  
OPERATE  
NG  
Ⅲ When it is required to put the unit in save mode:  
ON  
OFF  
•
Set the VTR switch to SAVE.  
Drum rotation stops and the GY-DV550 enters the  
tape protection/power-saving mode.  
12.When shooting is completely finished, eject the cassette  
and set the OPERATE switch to “OFF”.  
When the unit is not going to be used for a long period,  
detach the battery pack.  
1.  
12.  
4. Set the switches as required.  
• GAIN  
: Sensitivity suitable for the subject  
• OUTPUT : "CAM/AUTO KNEE ON"  
• WHT-BAL : "A" or "B"  
• Set the IRIS switch of the lens to "A".  
About the QUICK REC START Mode  
If the VTR trigger button is pressed immediately after the  
videocassette is inserted, the mode becomes the QUICK  
REC START mode that enables quick start of recording.  
However, when shooting starts in the middle of the tape, a  
blank space appears as the new scene will not be linked  
smoothly with the previous image.  
REC  
RET  
M
A
BATT  
ALARM  
W
T
8.  
5. Select the FILTER according to the lighting condition.  
Position 1 (3200K) : For shooting indoors or outdoors when  
illumination is not sufficient  
Position 2 (5600K + 1/8ND):  
For shooting outdoors.  
Position 3 (5600K + 1/64ND):  
Also, the time code does not continue. (Some overlap may  
also occur.)  
4.  
For shooting outdoors under a clear  
sky.  
8. TALLY lamp  
Note:  
6. Adjust the white balance.  
● The unit enters stop mode at tape-end automatically, and if kept longer than 3 minutes or 30 minutes in this mode, SAVE  
mode is maintained. ꢀ See “Menu No. 307: LONG PAUSE TIME” on page 75.  
7.  
ꢀ See "White Balance Adjustment" on page 47.  
● If the VTR trigger button is pushed very quickly and repeatedly, or the OPERATE switch is moved immediately after being  
pressed, the viewfinder REC indicator lamp may blink and the GY-DV550 may not enter the record mode.To remedy this  
condition set the OPERATE switch to OFF and wait for 5 seconds or more before turning the power on again.  
● A neat transition to the next recorded scene cannot be guaranteed if you end a recording by turning the OPERATE switch,  
POWER switch or DC power supply OFF, or by removing the battery pack.  
7.Point the camera at the subject and determine the angle of  
view and focus with the zoom lever and the focusing ring.  
● Before recording a scene that is particularly important, perform test shooting to ensure that normal recording is possible.  
● The power consumption can be reduced by setting the LIGHT switch on the display and TALLY lamp to OFF.  
● The microphone may pick up the sound of the lens’iris if the iris is changed abruptly or the iris is manually moved abruptly  
during recording.If you find the noise annoying, please purchase an optional microphone in order to move the microphone  
away from the lens or ensure that the iris is not changed abruptly during shooting.  
53  
54  
7. SHOOTING OPERATION  
7. SHOOTING OPERATION  
7-2 VCR Save Mode  
7-4 Checking Recorded Contents in Record-Pause Mode (Recording Check Function)  
In the record-pause or stop mode, approximately 7 seconds of  
1.  
RET button  
the last recorded portion can be played back.  
When a recordable videocassette is loaded, the GY-DV550  
enters the record-pause mode. However, the record-pause  
operation condition differs depending on the setting of theVTR  
switch.  
OPERATE/WARNING  
LIGHT  
ON  
OFF  
MODE  
RM  
VTR  
RESET  
•
•
The recorded contents can be checked in the viewfinder or  
on a monitor connected to the MONITOR OUT or Y/C OUT  
connectors.  
MONITOR  
INCOM  
MIC  
SELECT  
COUNTER  
CTL  
TC  
UB  
FILTER  
3200k  
5600k+1/8ND  
5600k+1/64ND  
CH-1  
CARBON  
DYNAMIC  
1
2
3
ALARM  
MIX  
CH-2  
INCOM  
MIC  
ON  
LEVEL  
SHUTTER STATUS  
MENU  
MONITOR  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
AUTO  
FRONT  
REAR  
MANUAL  
AUDIO SELECT  
AUDIO INPUT  
OFF  
CH-1 AUDIO CH-2  
LEVEL  
CALL  
A
U
T
O
I
R
I
S
F
U
L
L
A
U
T
O
B
L
A
C
K
LOLUX  
BACK  
NORMAL  
SPOT  
L
STRETCH  
RM  
OFF  
DC IN  
/BATT.  
NORMAL  
COMPRESS  
L
POWER  
NG  
OPERATE  
ON  
OFF  
● VTR switch setting  
In the viewfinder or on the monitor connected to the  
MONITOR OUT or Y/C OUT connectors, the video image  
from the VCR section is output.  
STBY : The GY-DV550 enters the record-pause mode, and  
the drum is rotating at this time. (Standby mode)  
The "STBY" indicator appears in the VCR operation  
status display in the viewfinder (in Status 1 mode).  
• In this condition, recording starts immediately when  
the VTR trigger button is pressed.  
1. In the record-pause or stop mode, press the RET button on  
the camera lens section.  
• The tape is slightly rewound and played back for  
approximately 7 seconds.  
VTR  
switch  
SAVE : The GY-DV550 enters the record-pause mode but  
the drum is not rotating. (Save mode).  
After playback is finished, the tape returns to the position  
at which the RET button is pressed and the record-pause  
mode resumes.  
OPERATE  
ON  
NG  
OFF  
The tape is protected.  
The "SAVE" indicator appears in the viewfinder (in  
Status 1 mode).  
Ⅲ When the RET button is kept pressed, the tape is rewound  
and played back for approximately 18 seconds at maximum.  
• While the RET button is pressed, the record-mode is not  
entered even if the VTR trigger button is pressed.  
The OPERATE indicator lights orange.  
* During recording check, the following indications will  
appear if the error rate increases due to head clogging,  
etc.  
• “RF” appears on the display panel.  
• “HEAD CLOG” appears on the counter display.  
• “VTR WARNING (HEAD)” appears in the viewfinder.  
* Recording check cannot be performed for an external  
VCR.  
CAUTION:  
•
•
When the VCR Setup Menu item No. 396 SSF MODE  
is set to the CUE MODE or MARK mode, the VCR  
save mode is not entered.  
Viewfinder  
ACCU - FOCUS  
External VCR will not enter the SAVE mode.  
G
F
Recording from the Save mode  
● In the save mode, pressing the VTR trigger button will start  
I
recording.  
SD  
B
VCR operation  
status display  
However, in this case, it takes several seconds before the  
GY-DV550 starts recording.  
CH1 -  
CH2 -  
-
-
-
-
<
-
-
- + -  
- + -  
6 0  
-
-
STBY  
or  
SAVE  
M : 099  
1 2 . 4V  
F5 . 6  
STBY  
● Pressing theVTR trigger button again interrupts the recording  
and the GY-DV550 enters the save mode again.  
(Status 1 mode)  
7-3 If Unit is Left in Record-Pause (Standby) Mode  
When the GY-DV550 has remained in record-pause (standby)  
• The time until the unit enters the tape protect mode after  
mode for about 30 minutes, the unit enters the save mode, in  
which the drum rotation is stopped automatically and the tape  
tension is released. (Tape protect mode)  
it is placed in record-pause mode can be set to 3 minutes  
or 30 minutes with the VCR Setup Menu item No. 307  
LONG PAUSE TIME.  
When used in a cold environment, the setting will be 3  
minutes regardless of the setting on the VCR Setup  
Menu.  
Ⅲ To start recording from the tape protect mode, press theVTR  
trigger button; the drum starts to rotate and recording starts  
in about 3 seconds.  
Ⅲ To return to the record-pause mode from the tape protect  
mode, press the VTR trigger button TWICE; the drum starts  
to rotate.  
ꢀ See page 75.  
55  
56  
7. SHOOTING OPERATION  
7. SHOOTING OPERATION  
7-5 Recording External Video Signals  
7-6 Recording with an External VCR  
2. MODE switch  
PUSH  
OPERATE/WARNING  
LIGHT  
OPERATE/WARNING  
MODE  
RM  
VTR  
LIGHT  
ON  
OFF  
RESET  
ON  
MODE  
RM  
VTR  
OFF  
RESET  
DV CAMCORDER  
GY-DV550  
VTR/RM  
MONITOR  
INCOM  
MONITOR  
SELECT  
COUNTER  
MIC  
INCOM  
MIC  
SELECT  
COUNTER  
CTL  
TC  
UB  
FILTER  
3200k  
CH-1  
MIX  
CH-2  
CTL  
FILTER  
3200k  
5600k+1/8ND  
5600k+1/64ND  
CH-1  
MIX  
CH-2  
CARBON  
DYNAMIC  
ALARM  
TC  
UB  
CARBON  
DYNAMIC  
1
2
3
ALARM  
1
2
3
5600k+1/8ND  
5600k+1/64ND  
INCOM  
MIC  
ON  
INCOM  
MIC  
ON  
LEVEL  
LEVEL  
SHUTTER STATUS  
MENU  
MONITOR  
SHUTTER STATUS  
MENU  
MONITOR  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
AUTO  
FRONT  
REAR  
AUTO  
FRONT  
REAR  
MANUAL  
MANUAL  
AUDIO SELECT  
AUDIO INPUT  
AUDIO SELECT  
AUDIO INPUT  
OFF  
OFF  
CH-1 AUDIO CH-2  
LEVEL  
CALL  
CH-1  
AUDIO CH-2  
LEVEL  
CALL  
AUTO IRIS  
F
U
L
L
A
U
T
O
B
L
A
C
K
LOLUX  
AUTO IRIS  
F
U
L
L
A
U
T
O
B
L
A
C
K
LOLUX  
BACK  
NORMAL  
SPOT  
L
STRETCH  
PROMPTER  
OUTPUT  
RM  
OFF  
DC IN  
/BATT.  
NORMAL  
COMPRESS  
BACK  
NORMAL  
SPOT  
L
STRETCH  
RM  
OFF  
DC IN  
/BATT.  
L
NORMAL  
COMPRESS  
L
GENLOCK/AUX IN  
VIDEO OUT  
CLH-I1NE OUT  
CH-2  
Y/C OUT MONITOR OUT  
POWER  
POWER  
REMOTE  
AUDIO IN  
FRONT  
NG  
OPERATE  
TC IN  
TC OUT  
ON  
OFF  
NG  
OPERATE  
LENS  
ON  
OFF  
PUSH  
AUDIO  
LEVEL  
VTR/RM multi-pin  
connector  
1. POWER switch  
4. VTR SELECT switch  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
AUTO  
FRONT  
REAR  
MANUAL  
DV CAMCORDER  
GY-DV550  
AUDIO SELECT  
VTR SELECT TC GENE.  
AUDIO INPUT  
VTR/RM  
AUDIO  
LEVEL  
CH-1  
CH-2  
SEE  
CONTINUE  
REC  
FREE  
MENU  
INSTR-  
UCTION  
MANUAL  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
INT  
PRST  
REGEN  
PARA  
EXT  
AUTO  
FRONT  
REAR  
MANUAL  
LITHIUM BATT.  
AUDIO SELECT  
VTR SELECT TC GENE.  
AUDIO INPUT  
GROUP  
HOLD  
ITEM  
SHIFT  
SELECT  
ADVANCE PRESET  
DATA SET  
CAM AUX  
SEE  
CONTINUE  
REC  
FREE  
MENU  
PROMPTER  
OUTPUT  
INSTR-  
UCTION  
MANUAL  
INT  
PARA  
EXT  
PRST  
REGEN  
GENLOCK/AUX IN  
VIDEO OUT  
CLH-I1NE OUT  
CH-2  
Y/C OUT MONITOR OUT  
VTR INPUT  
LITHIUM BATT.  
GROUP  
HOLD  
ITEM  
SHIFT  
SELECT DATA SET  
ADVANCE PRESET  
REMOTE  
CAM AUX  
AUDIO IN  
FRONT  
TC IN  
TC OUT  
LENS  
VTR INPUT  
VTR INPUT switch  
3. VTR INPUT switch  
GENLOCK/AUX IN  
With this unit, camera images can be recorded on an external  
VCR connected to the VTR/RM multi-pin connector.  
There are 2 types of externalVCR recording:parallel recording  
where recording is performed on both the unit and external  
VCR and independent recording where recording is performed  
only on the external VCR.  
3. Set the VTR INPUT switch to CAM.  
Other than camera images, composite video signals from an  
external device connected to the GENLOCK/AUX IN connector  
can also be recorded with this unit.  
When recording external video signals, perform the following  
connection and setting.  
Ⅲ About the status screen display of the viewfinder  
During external video signal recording, camera setting related  
information will not be displayed on the status screens.  
The displayed status screens are as follows:  
Memo:  
External video signals will not be outputted to the VTR/  
RM connector (26-pin) even when setting the VTR  
INPUT switch to AUX.  
•
Status screens 0 and 1 are displayed. Status screen 2 will  
not be displayed.  
When recording on an external VCR, perform the following  
connection and settings.  
Ⅲ Input the stabilized composite video signals to the GENLOCK/  
AUX IN connector.  
•
•
AUX will appear on the upper right of the screen.  
INT will constantly appear in the VTR SELECT display.  
4. Select the recording VCR using the VTR SELECT switch.  
Ⅲ
Connect the external VCR to the VTR/RM multi-pin  
connector.See the following table for compatibleVCRs and  
connecting cables.  
Input level: 1V (P-P) 0.3V (P-P)  
•
For parallel recording (this unit and external VCR), set  
the switch to PARA.  
Ⅲ Set the VTR INPUT switch to AUX.  
AUX indicator  
•
To record only with the external VCR, set the switch to  
EXT.  
Connecting VCR  
Connecting cable  
Memo:  
AUX  
Model  
Connector  
14-pin  
•
External video signals can only be recorded on the  
VCR of this unit. The VTR SELECT switch setting is  
ignored.  
Memo:  
S-VHS (U MODEL)  
BR-S405  
VC-P482 (2m)  
VC-P484 (4m)  
VTR SELECT information is displayed in status screen  
1 of the viewfinder according to theVTR SELECT switch  
setting (PARA or EXT display).  
STATUS button  
D9  
26-pin  
VC-P454B (4m)  
External video signals will not be recorded on the  
external VCR connected to the VTR/RM connector.  
During external video signal recording, recording  
check by pressing the RET button on the lens section  
cannot be performed.  
When setting the VTR/RM switch to RM, external  
video signals will not be recorded even if the VTR  
INPUT switch is set AUX.  
BR-D40+SA-S40  
For the connection of other VCRs, contact your nearest JVC  
dealer.  
•
•
M : 099  
1 2 . 4V  
5. The output video signals from the VTR/RM multi-pin  
connector can be selected in 26 PIN OUT item on the  
Camera SETUP menu screen.  
Other than composite signals, another type of video signals  
can be selected.  
Status screen 0  
Settings  
AUX  
1. Selecting the power source  
(Y/C, RGB, and component video signals)  
ꢀ See “26 PIN OUT” on page 83.  
The GENLOCK/AUX IN connector will function as a  
synchronous signal input connector.  
Set the POWER switch to DC IN/BATT.  
CAUTION:  
•
•
The camera images will be outputted from theVIDEO  
OUT connector andVTR/RM multi-pin connector even  
when setting the VTR INPUT switch to AUX.  
For details concerning the output images when setting  
theVTR INPUT switch to AUX, see the following table.  
Whether to add setup signals can be selected in  
SETUP item of the Camera SETUP menu screen. (U  
MODEL)  
It is not possible to supply power to the main unit from  
an external VCR through the VTR/RM multi-pin  
connector.  
Memo:  
CH1 -  
CH2 -  
-
-
-
-
<
-
-
- + -  
- + -  
6 0  
-
-
I NT  
INT indicator  
M : 099  
1 2 . 4V  
Only CH1 audio signal will be outputted from VTR/RM  
multi-pin connector for the audio signal.  
STBY  
Status screen 1  
2. Selecting the device connected to the VTR/RM multi-pin  
connector  
CAUTION:  
To connect the externalVCR, set the MODE switch toVTR.  
Do not change the VTR INPUT switch setting during  
recording.  
Output signals when setting the VTR INPUT switch to AUX  
Viewfinder  
MONITOR  
OUT  
Y/C OUT  
VIDEO VTR/RM  
OUT (26-pin)  
AUX (external) AUX (external) AUX (external) Camera Camera  
video video video images images  
57  
58  
8. PLAYBACK MODE  
7. SHOOTING OPERATION  
7-6 Recording with an External VCR (Cont'd)  
8-1 Playback Procedure  
2.  
AUDIO  
LEVEL  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
AUTO  
FRONT  
REAR  
OPERATE/WARNING  
MANUAL  
LIGHT  
ON  
OFF  
MODE  
RM  
VTR  
RESET  
AUDIO SELECT  
VTR SELECT TC GENE.  
AUDIO INPUT  
2. EJECT button  
MONITOR  
INCOM  
MIC  
SELECT  
COUNTER  
CTL  
TC  
UB  
FILTER  
3200k  
5600k+1/8ND  
5600k+1/64ND  
CH-1  
MIX  
CH-2  
CARBON  
DYNAMIC  
ALARM  
1
2
3
SEE  
CONTINUE  
REC  
FREE  
MENU  
INSTR-  
UCTION  
MANUAL  
INT  
INCOM  
PRST  
REGEN  
MIC  
ON  
LEVEL  
SHUTTER STATUS  
MENU  
MONITOR  
PARA  
EXT  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
AUTO  
FRONT  
REAR  
MANUAL  
AUDIO SELECT  
AUDIO INPUT  
LITHIUM BATT.  
OFF  
GROUP  
HOLD  
ITEM  
SHIFT  
SELECT  
ADVANCE PRESET  
DATA SET  
EJECT  
CH-1 AUDIO CH-2  
LEVEL  
CAM AUX  
CALL  
AUTO IRIS  
F
U
L
L
A
U
T
O
B
L
A
C
K
LOLUX  
BACK  
NORMAL  
SPOT  
L
STRETCH  
OPERATE/WARNING  
NORMAL  
COMPRESS  
LIGHT  
L
MODE  
RM  
VTR  
RESET  
ON  
OFF  
VTR INPUT  
MONITOR  
POWER  
INCOM  
MIC  
SELECT  
COUNTER  
CTL  
TC  
UB  
FILTER  
3200k  
5600k+1/8ND  
5600k+1/64ND  
CH-1  
MIX  
CH-2  
CARBON  
DYNAMIC  
ALARM  
1
2
3
NG  
OPERATE  
INCOM  
MIC  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
LEVEL  
SHUTTER STATUS  
MENU  
MONITOR  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
VTR SELECT switch  
AUTO  
FRONT  
REAR  
MANUAL  
LOG  
REW  
STOP  
FF  
PLAY  
STILL  
AUDIO SELECT  
AUDIO INPUT  
OFF  
CH-1 AUDIO CH-2  
LEVEL  
CALL  
AUTO IRIS  
F
U
L
L
A
U
T
O
B
L
A
C
K
LOLUX  
BACK  
NORMAL  
SPOT  
L
STRETCH  
RM  
OFF  
DC IN  
/BATT.  
NORMAL  
COMPRESS  
L
POWER  
VTR switch OPERATE switch  
NG  
OPERATE  
POWER switch  
ON  
OFF  
6. STOP button  
4. STILL button  
About the return video/audio signal monitor of  
the external VCR  
Operation  
3. PLAY button  
5.  
1. OPERATE switch  
1. POWER switch  
1. Set the OPERATE switch to ON.  
With this unit, the return video signals and audio signals of the  
external VCR can be checked through the VTR/RM multi-pin  
connector.  
•
Camera images will be outputted from theVTR/RM multi-  
pin connector.  
•
Standby signal will be sent to the external VCR.  
CAUTION:  
Operation  
•
When the still picture mode or stop mode has continued  
for about 30 minutes, the unit automatically switches to  
the save mode to protect the tape.  
The time until the tape protect mode is initiated can be  
set to 3 or 30 minutes with the VCR Setup Menu item  
No. 307 LONG PAUSE TIME.  
When used in a cold environment, the setting will be 3  
minutes regardless of the setting on the VCR Setup  
Menu.  
Noise may appear in the picture during still mode.  
When the automatic tracking function is activated at the  
start of the playback mode, digital noise may appear on  
the playback image.  
This unit does not allow manual tracking adjustment.  
When playing back a tape recorded on another unit,  
digital noise may appear during playback.  
When turning on the power with the tape inserted or after  
loading a tape, the built-in head cleaner will emit a sound  
while operating. However, this is not a malfunction of the  
unit.  
External VCR mode  
During playback  
Return signals  
Playback images and playback  
sound  
2. For parallel recording (this unit and external VCR), set the  
1. Set the POWER switch to DC IN/BATT. and set the  
VTR switch to STBY.  
OPERATE switch to ON.  
•
This unit will enter the standby mode.  
Other than playback  
E-E images and E-E sound of  
external VCR  
Memo:  
2. Load the recorded videocassette correctly.  
The external VCR will not enter the SAVE mode even  
when setting the VTR switch to SAVE.  
•
Slide the EJECT switch to the side. When the cassette  
cover opens, insert the videocassette and then close the  
cassette cover again.  
Operation  
Ⅲ When a recordable videocassette (with the switch on the  
back of the cassette set to REC) is loaded, the unit enters  
the record-pause mode (STBY mode).  
In this case, press the STOP button to release the record-  
pause mode.  
3. Press the VTR trigger button to start recording.  
•
•
Ⅲ To pause recording, press the VTR trigger button again.  
1. Set the VTR SELECT switch to EXT.  
•
During recording, the REC/ALARM lamp on the  
viewfinder will light. In addition, “REC 2” will appear on  
status screen 1 of the viewfinder.  
CAUTION:  
Do not change the VTR SELECT switch setting during  
recording.  
•
•
3. Press the PLAY button.  
a
The PLAY indicator lights and playback starts.  
2. Press the RET button on the lens section.  
The return video and audio of the external VCR can be  
monitored wile the RET is held down.  
Return video: Can be monitored on the viewfinder.  
Return audio: Can be monitored using speakers or  
earphones.  
•
4. Press the STILL button to stop playback temporarily.  
a The STILL indicator lights and the unit enters the  
still mode.  
Status screen 1  
ACCU - FOCUS  
External VCR status  
REC 2 lamp on: Recording  
REC 2 lamp flashing: Alarm  
G
F
I
5.To re-start playback, press the PLAY button.  
a The STILL indicator goes out and playback starts  
again.  
Memo:  
Memo:  
•
During monitoring of the return audio, the volume can  
be adjusted using MONITOR volume.  
•
If a tape recorded in the LETTER mode is played back  
on a 4:3 aspect ratio monitorTV.Images will be displayed  
in the letter box (16:9 aspect ratio) that is split horizontally.  
SD  
B
REC2  
EXT  
F5 . 6  
STBY  
6.To stop playback, press the STOP button.  
a The PLAY indicator goes out and the unit enters  
the stop mode.  
However, the return audio is not displayed on the  
audio level meter of the display.The AUDIO MONITOR  
switch is also disabled.  
CH1 -  
CH2 -  
-
-
-
-
>
-
-
- + -  
- + -  
6 0  
-
-
C : 123  
1 2 . 4V  
Playback of tape recorded  
in LETTER mode  
Status display of this unit’s VCR  
VCR SELECT information  
EXT: External VCR  
PARA: External VCR + this unit  
INT: This unit  
About the external VCR alarm display  
4:3 aspect ratio monitor 16:9 aspect ratio monitor  
•
When the alarm of the external VCR is on, the REC/ALARM  
lamp of the viewfinder will flash. Furthermore, the REC 2  
indicator on the viewfinder status screen 1 will also flash.  
Memo:  
•
The battery alarm of the external VCR will not be displayed  
on this unit.  
When theVTR SELECT switch is set to EXT, theTALLY  
lamp turns on during recording.  
•
•
When playing back tape recorded in the LETTER or  
WIDE mode, 16:9 screen detection ID signal will not be  
outputted from the Y/C OUT connector.  
ID signal is also not outputted when inputting WIDE  
signals via the DV connector (IEEE1394 signals).  
59  
60  
9. TIME CODE OPERATION  
8. PLAYBACK MODE  
The GY-DV550 records SMPTE-standard (U MODEL)/EBU-standard (E MODEL) time codes and user's bits. In the play or record  
mode, the reproduced time codes or user's bits are shown on the counter display.  
8-2 Fast-Forward, Rewind  
The LTC signal from the built-in time code generator is output through the TC OUT connector.  
In the play mode, the time code recorded on the tape is not output through the units connectors.  
•
Do not directly turn off the POWER switch in the record-pause mode; otherwise, time codes will not continue.  
Be absolutely sure to turn off the OPERATE switch beforehand.  
9-1 Displaying Time Code  
REW button  
FF button  
OPERATE/WARNING  
RESET  
LIGHT  
ON  
OFF  
MODE  
RM  
VTR  
MONITOR  
SELECT  
INCOM  
MIC  
COUNTER  
CTL  
TC  
UB  
FILTER  
3200k  
5600k+1/8ND  
5600k+1/64ND  
CH-1  
CARBON  
DYNAMIC  
ALARM  
MIX  
CH-2  
1
2
3
Hour Min. Sec. Frame  
INCOM  
MIC  
ON  
LEVEL  
SHUTTER STATUS  
MENU  
MONITOR  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
AUTO  
FRONT  
REAR  
MANUAL  
LOG  
REW  
STOP  
FF  
PLAY  
STILL  
AUDIO SELECT  
AUDIO INPUT  
OFF  
CH-1 AUDIO CH-2  
LEVEL  
CALL  
AUTO IRIS  
F
U
L
L
A
U
T
O
B
L
A
C
K
LOLUX  
BACK  
NORMAL  
SPOT  
L
STRETCH  
RM  
OFF  
DC IN  
/BATT.  
NORMAL  
COMPRESS  
L
H
M
S
F
POWER  
Time code display  
NG  
OPERATE  
ON  
OFF  
STOP button  
User’s bit display  
OPERATE/WARNING  
LIGHT  
ON  
OFF  
OVER  
dB  
MODE  
RM  
VTR  
CH  
CH  
1
2
AUTO OFF DEW  
RESET  
40 30  
20  
10  
0
COUNTER switch  
OVER SERVO RF  
L
i
32k  
48k  
SLAVE  
PB  
NDF  
HOLD  
MONITOR  
AUD LOCK SP  
Ⅲ Press the FF button in stop mode to fast forward the tape.  
Press the REW button in stop mode to rewind the tape.  
INCOM  
MIC  
COUNTER  
CTL  
TC  
UB  
SELECT  
WIDE  
MENU  
•
•
When the tape approaches the end during fast forwarding  
or rewinding, the tape speed decelerates to protect the  
tape.  
The time required for fast forwarding and rewinding may  
become longer when used in a cold environment.This is  
not a malfunction.  
H
M
S
F
CH-1  
MIX  
CH-2  
E
BATT  
F
REMAIN  
CARBON  
DYNAMIC  
REV FWD  
H
M
INCOM  
Ⅲ Press the STOP button to stop fast forwarding or rewinding.  
MIC  
ON  
LEVEL  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
AUTO  
FRONT  
REAR  
MANUAL  
The selected time codes can be shown on the counter display  
during playback and recording as follows.  
AUDIO SELECT  
AUDIO INPUT  
OFF  
AUDIO  
LEVEL  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CALL  
Ⅲ Set the VCR Setup Menu item No. 516 DISPLAY SELECT to  
RM  
OFF  
DC IN  
/BATT.  
“TC”.  
ꢀ See page 75.  
POWER  
Ⅲ Set the COUNTER switch to "TC" or "UB".  
TC: Time codes are displayed.  
UB: User's bit data of time codes are displayed.  
8-3 Search  
9-2 Presetting and Recording of Time Code  
REW button FF button  
OPERATE/WARNING  
LIGHT  
The time code or user's bit data to be recorded onto the tape can be preset to a desired value.  
TC GENE Switch  
MODE  
RM  
VTR  
RESET  
ON  
OFF  
MONITOR  
INCOM  
MIC  
SELECT  
COUNTER  
CTL  
TC  
UB  
FILTER  
3200k  
CH-1  
CARBON  
DYNAMIC  
ALARM  
MIX  
CH-2  
1
2
3
5600k+1/8ND  
5600k+1/64ND  
NON DROP : The time code generator's running method is set  
INCOM  
MIC  
ON  
LEVEL  
SHUTTER STATUS  
MENU  
MONITOR  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
AUTO  
FRONT  
REAR  
MANUAL  
to the non drop frame mode.  
Use this setting when placing emphasis on the  
number of frames.  
In the NON DROP frame mode, the "NDF"  
indicator lights on the display.  
LOG  
REW  
STOP  
FF  
PLAY  
STILL  
AUDIO SELECT  
AUDIO INPUT  
OFF  
AUDIO  
LEVEL  
CH-1 AUDIO CH-2  
LEVEL  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CALL  
AUTO IRIS  
F
U
L
L
A
U
T
O
B
L
A
C
K
LOLUX  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
BACK  
NORMAL  
SPOT  
L
STRETCH  
RM  
OFF  
DC IN  
/BATT.  
NORMAL  
COMPRESS  
L
AUTO  
FRONT  
REAR  
MANUAL  
POWER  
AUDIO SELECT  
VTR SELECT TC GENE.  
AUDIO INPUT  
NG  
OPERATE  
ON  
OFF  
SEE  
CONTINUE  
REC  
FREE  
MENU  
INSTR-  
UCTION  
MANUAL  
INT  
PRST  
REGEN  
PARA  
EXT  
STOP button PLAY button  
LITHIUM BATT.  
GROUP  
HOLD  
ITEM  
SHIFT  
SELECT  
ADVANCE PRESET  
DATA SET  
CAM AUX  
NDF  
VTR INPUT  
Ⅲ Press the FF button in play mode to search the tape in the  
forward direction at about 10 times the normal speed.  
• The audio is reproduced during the search.  
• Video noise may be observed or the image may become  
unstable during the search, but this is not a malfunction.  
H
M
S
F
Ⅲ Setting the time code related switches  
•
Press the REW button in play mode to search the tape in  
the reverse direction at about 10 times the normal speed.  
• Set the TC GENE switch to REC or FREE.  
REC : The data preset in the time code generator runs  
only during recording.  
Drop frame/Non-drop frame mode (U MODEL)  
In the NTSC system, the actual number of frames per 1  
second is approximately 29.97 frames, but the number of  
frames that becomes the processing reference of the time  
code is 30 frames. To compensate for this difference, the  
mode called drop mode drops frame 00 and 01 for every  
minute that cannot be divided by 10.  
Ⅲ Press the PLAY button to resume normal playback.  
Use this setting if it is required to record continual  
time codes across different scenes.  
* However, approximately 1-frame variations may  
occur in scene transition accuracy.  
Ⅲ Press the STOP button to stop.  
FREE : The time code starts to run from the time it is preset  
in the time code generator.  
The non-drop frame mode is when no frames are dropped  
and the actual time shift is neglected.  
Ⅲ Setting the VCR Setup Menu (U MODEL)  
•
Set the VCR Setup Menu item No. 516 DISPLAY SELECT to  
“TC”.  
Note:  
Select the time code generator's framing mode using the VCR  
Setup Menu item No. 416 NON DROP/DROP.  
When the VCR Setup Menu item No. 398 SSF MODE is set  
to CUE MODE or MARK MODE, the time code generator’s  
running method is internally set to the REGEN mode.  
When this is the case and you want to enter the preset  
mode, set the VCR Setup Menu item No. 398 SSF MODE  
to “OFF”, or set the TC GENE switch to the REC or FREE  
position again.  
DROP  
: The time code generator's running method is set  
to the drop frame mode.  
Use this setting when placing emphasis on the  
recording time.  
The “DF” indicator lights up on the display in the  
drop-frame mode.  
61  
62  
9. TIME CODE OPERATION  
9. TIME CODE OPERATION  
9-3 Recording Time Codes by Slave-Locking the Built-in Time Code Generator with External TCG  
9-2 Presetting and Recording of Time Code (Cont’d)  
The built-in time code generator can be synchronized (slave-locked) with the SMPTE-standard (U MODEL)/EBU-standard (E  
MODEL) LTC time code signal which is input through the TC IN connector. Once the slave locking has been carried out, the built-  
in time code generator runs even when the external time code input stops. Even when the power is switched off, it continues to run  
on the backup lithium battery.  
TIME CODE PRESETTING PROCEDURE  
1. Display the time code on the counter display.  
2. HOLD button  
4. SHIFT button  
Set the COUNTER switch to "TC".  
Sync signal generator  
•
Time code up to 23 hrs. 59 min. 59 sec.29 frames can be  
preset.  
PUSH  
AUDIO  
CH-2  
CH-1  
LEVEL  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
2. Place the time code generator in preset mode.  
AUTO  
FRONT  
REAR  
MANUAL  
Press the HOLD button.  
AUDIO SELECT  
VTR SELECT TC GENE.  
AUDIO INPUT  
REF Video signal  
•
The "HOLD" indicator lights on the display to indicate  
the preset mode. The first digit of the counter display  
blinks.  
SEE  
DV CAMCORDER  
CONTINUE  
REC  
FREE  
MENU  
VTR/RM  
INSTR-  
UCTION  
MANUAL  
GY-DV550  
INT  
PARA  
EXT  
PRST  
REGEN  
LITHIUM BATT.  
GROUP  
HOLD  
ITEM  
SHIFT  
SELECT  
ADVANCE PRESET  
DATA SET  
CAM AUX  
External time code generator  
VTR INPUT  
3. Set the value of the blinking digit.  
PROMPTER  
OUTPUT  
GENLOCK/AUX IN  
CLH-I1NE OUT  
Press the ADVANCE button.  
The value of the blinking digit changes.  
Y/C OUT MONITOR OUT  
VIDEO OUT  
CH-2  
6.  
REMOTE  
3. ADVANCE  
•
AUDIO IN  
FRONT  
PRESET  
button  
TC IN  
TC OUT  
LENS  
button  
4. Change the blinking digit.  
HOLD  
LTC time code signal  
Press the SHIFT button.  
The blinking digit changes.  
GENLOCK/AUX  
IN connector  
REF Video signal  
•
H
H
H
H
M
M
M
M
S
S
S
S
F
HOLD  
5. Set the desired value for all digits.  
Repeat steps 3. and 4. for each digit.  
1. Input the reference video signal into the external time code  
5. Set and operate the external time code generator.  
F
generator and the GENLOCK/AUX IN connector of this unit.  
➡
The built-in time code generator is slave-locked with the  
input external time code data.  
6. Preset the set data in the memory.  
HOLD  
Press the PRESET button.  
Note :  
The SLAVE indicator lights on the display.  
•
The set data is saved as the time code generator value.  
Following the above operation, the "HOLD" indicator  
disappears from the display, the counter stops blinking  
and the time code is preset.  
When the power is switched ON while external sync signal  
is input, the screen moves in a vertical direction for a few  
seconds. This is not a malfunction.  
F
HOLD  
SLAVE  
F
•
If the REC/FREE switch is set to FREE, the time code  
starts to run.  
H
M
S
F
2. Input the SMPTE standard LTC time code signal into the  
TC IN connector.  
* If the external time code generator phase is not genlocked  
with the phase of the camera video signals, the “SLAVE”  
display will flicker.  
Ⅲ If you preset a wrong time code, perform steps 2. 3. 4. 5. and  
6. again.  
3. Display time code on the counter display.  
•
Once slave locking has been made, the built-in time code  
generator keeps on running even when the external time  
code generator is stopped.  
4. Set the switches in the TC GENERATOR block as follows.  
•
Set the TC GENE switch to “FREE”.  
*
While the TC GENE switch is set to “REC” or “REGEN”,  
slave-locking will not take place.  
Note :  
Do not connect or disconnect slaves during recording as  
this may disturb the servo lock.  
Ⅵ Set the related VCR Setup Menus.  
•
Set the VCR Setup Menu item No. 398 SSF MODE to  
“OFF”.  
* If set to CUE mode or MARK mode, the slave-locking  
will not take place.  
Set the VCR Setup Menu item No. 403 U-BIT SLAVE.  
Set to “TC&UB” when the user’s bits should also be slave-  
locked with the external time code generator.  
The framing mode will be the same mode as the  
automatically entered time code (drop frame of non-drop  
frame).  
PRESETTING USER'S BIT DATA  
Ⅲ Display user's bit data on the counter display and perform  
the same procedure as the time code presetting procedure.  
Multi-Camcorder Master-Slave Connection  
When there is only one slave GY-DV550, connect it as indicated  
in the figure below.  
When connecting several GY-DV550s as slaves, input the REF  
video signal to GENLOCK/AUX IN connectors of all these units  
from the sync signal generator.  
RESET button  
•
The user's bit can be specified using numerals or alphabetic  
letters from 0 to F for each digit.  
OPERATE/WARNING  
•
•
LIGHT  
OVER  
CH  
CH  
1
2
AUTO OFF DEW  
ON  
RESET  
40 30  
20  
10  
0
dB  
OVER SERVO RF  
L
i
OFF  
32k  
48k  
SLAVE  
PB  
NDF  
HOLD  
SP  
WIDE  
AUD LOCK  
MENU  
MONITOR  
COUNTER  
CTL  
TC  
UB  
SELECT  
H
M
S
F
Note:  
CH-1  
MIX  
CH-2  
E
BATT  
F
REMAIN  
REV FWD  
H
M
Do not set “F” to all user’s bit, or the data can not be read.  
MASTER  
SLAVE  
During the non-drop frame mode, the NDF indicator will  
light on the display.  
PUSH  
PUSH  
During the drop frame mode, the DF indicator will light  
on the display.  
(U MODEL)  
DV CAMCORDER  
GY-DV550  
DV CAMCORDER  
GY-DV550  
VTR/RM  
VTR/RM  
•
•
Pressing the RESET button in the preset mode resets  
the time code or user's bit data to 00 00 00 00.  
If you press the HOLD button by mistake, press the HOLD  
button once more to return to the previous display.  
PROMPTER  
OUTPUT  
PROMPTER  
OUTPUT  
GENLOCK/AUX IN  
VIDEO OUT  
GENLOCK/AUX IN  
VIDEO OUT  
CLH-I1NE OUT  
CH-2  
Y/C OUT MONITOR OUT CLH-I1NE OUT  
Y/C OUT MONITOR OUT  
CH-2  
REMOTE  
REMOTE  
AUDIO IN  
FRONT  
AUDIO IN  
FRONT  
T
C
I
N
TC OUT  
T
C
I
N
TC OUT  
LENS  
LENS  
TC OUT  
MONITOR OUT  
TC IN  
GENLOCK/  
AUX IN  
63  
64  
10. S.S.F. (Super Scene Finder) FUNCTION  
9. TIME CODE OPERATION  
9-4 RecordingTime Codes in Continuation ofTime Codes Recorded onTape  
10-1 Explanation of the S.S.F. Function  
During recording, the S.S.F. function records the time code data at the point of time of a desired recorded scene in the unit's  
memory. Using the S.S.F. data stored in memory during after-processing of the recorded image allows efficient use of the tape.  
The S.S.F. function comprises the two modes CUE and MARK. Select the mode using the VCR Setup Menu item No. 398 S.S.F.  
MODE.  
When the VCR Setup Menu item No. 398 SSF MODE is set to CUE MODE or MARK MODE, the time code generator’s running  
method is internally set to the REGEN mode.  
The GY-DV550 also incorporates a time code reader.Therefore, when the unit enters record mode from record-pause mode, it can  
read the time code data recorded on the tape and record time codes in continuation of the existing data. The recorded user's bit  
data is identical to the user's bit data recorded on tape.  
* However, approximately 1-frame variations may occur in scene transition accuracy.  
To enable this, set the time code related switches as follows before starting recording.  
When shooting in either of the modes, the time code data is stored in the unit's memory when the TAKE button on the front section  
is pressed.  
The model ID data, reel number, the number of each scene, and the time code data of IN points, OUT points, and CUE points are  
recorded as S.S.F. data.  
Ⅲ CUE Mode:  
When the TAKE button is pressed at the desired scene during shooting of a given cut, the time code data at that point is stored  
as CUE data in the unit's memory. The time code data at the time when recording is started or stopped with the VTR TRIGGER  
button are stored in the unit’s memory as scene data.  
PRESET/REGEN switch  
Setting  
AUDIO  
LEVEL  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
Ⅲ • Set the VCR Setup Menu item No. 302 BACK SPACE to  
AUTO  
FRONT  
REAR  
MANUAL  
“STANDARD”.  
AUDIO SELECT  
VTR SELECT TC GENE.  
AUDIO INPUT  
SEE  
CONTINUE  
REC  
FREE  
MENU  
•
Set the VCR Setup Menu item No. 516 DISPLAY SELECT  
INSTR-  
UCTION  
MANUAL  
INT  
PRST  
REGEN  
PARA  
EXT  
to “TC”.  
Scene  
LITHIUM BATT.  
GROUP  
HOLD  
ITEM  
SHIFT  
SELECT  
ADVANCE PRESET  
DATA SET  
CAM AUX  
ꢀ See page 75.  
5 sec  
or more  
5 sec  
or more  
VTR INPUT  
REC start  
REC pause  
Ⅲ Set the counter display to show time codes or user's bit data.  
Shooting started  
with VTR trigger  
Ⅲ Set the TC GENE switch to REGEN.  
CUE 1  
time code data  
CUE 2  
time code data  
CUE 3  
OUT  
IN  
time code data  
time code data time code data  
•
The framing mode of the time code will be the mode auto-  
matically recorded on the tape (drop frame or non-drop  
frame).  
(U MODEL)  
TAKE button  
TAKE button  
TAKE button  
Note:  
•
•
Leave an interval of at least 5 seconds between memorization of CUE data.  
If the TAKE button is pressed within 5 seconds from the previous point, the new point is not memorized.  
In the CUE mode, time code log data stored on the camera memory may differ from the actual time code recorded on tape  
at the time of pressing the TAKE button. This difference may be within 3 frames and it is not a malfunction.  
9-5 Reproducing Time Codes  
The GY-DV550 incorporates a time code reader. During playback, the time code or user's bit data recorded on the tape is displayed  
on the counter display.  
Ⅲ MARK MODE  
During shooting of a given cut, press the TAKE button at beginning of a desired scene and then press the TAKE button again at  
the ending of the scene.  
The time code data at the point where the TAKE button is pressed first becomes the start point of the scene and time code data  
at the point where the TAKE button is pressed the second time becomes the ending point, and both are stored in the unit's  
memory.  
Ⅲ Set theVCR Setup Menu item No. 516 DISPLAY SELECT to  
“TC”.  
Cut  
ꢀ See page 75.  
REC start  
REC pause  
Shooting started  
with VTR trigger  
OPERATE/WARNING  
LIGHT  
MODE  
RM  
VTR  
RESET  
ON  
OFF  
Ⅲ Set the counter display to indicate time code or user's bit  
data.  
MONITOR  
INCOM  
MIC  
SELECT  
COUNTER  
CTL  
TC  
UB  
FILTER  
3200k  
CH-1  
CARBON  
DYNAMIC  
ALARM  
MIX  
CH-2  
1
2
3
IN  
OUT  
time code data  
IN time  
code data  
OUT  
time code data  
5600k+1/8ND  
5600k+1/64ND  
INCOM  
MIC  
ON  
LEVEL  
SHUTTER STATUS  
MENU  
MONITOR  
time code data  
H-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
AUTO  
FRONT  
REAR  
MANUAL  
AUDIO SELECT  
AUDIO INPUT  
OFF  
CH-1 AUDIO CH-2  
LEVEL  
Ⅲ Reproducing time codes  
CALL  
AUTO IRIS  
F
U
L
L
A
U
T
O
B
L
A
C
K
LOLUX  
BACK  
NORMAL  
SPOT  
L
STRETCH  
RM  
OFF  
DC IN  
/BATT.  
NORMAL  
COMPRESS  
L
Press the PLAY button.  
Scene 1  
Scene 2  
POWER  
•
The “PB” indicator lights up on the display and the time  
NG  
OPERATE  
ON  
OFF  
code or user’s bit data are indicated.  
TAKE button  
TAKE button  
TAKE button  
TAKE button  
•
When playing back sections where the time code is not  
recorded, the time code progression stops.  
The playback mode continues.  
PB  
•
The number of scenes that can be registered is 127, and up to 238 registered scene numbers can be stored in memory.  
When either of these capacities is reached, the indication showing the number of registered scenes on the viewfinder screen  
becomes “M: - - -”.  
Up to 253 CUE points can be stored in memory.  
For each registered CUE point, the scene number decreases by two.  
When recording in the S.S.F. mode, the reel number (cassette number) for each cassette is recorded in the memory of the  
GY-DV550 and on tape.  
When the videocassette is replaced, new S.S.F. data is generated. S.S.F. data for six videocassettes can be stored in the  
internal memory.  
Before recording the seventh cassette in the S.S.F. mode, be sure that necessary data has been transferred from the  
memory to the non-linear editing controller or other component, or write data to the tape for each recording. ꢀ See page 69.  
H
M
S
F
•
•
•
Note:  
•
•
Time code more than two hours can not be displayed  
correctly by consumer DV equipment, which has no  
capability to display more than two hours.  
The time code being played back will not be outputted to  
the TC OUT connector.  
Note:  
•
•
When recording is not performed in the S.S.F. mode, be sure to set the VCR SETUP MENU item No. 398 SSF MODE to OFF.  
Be sure to record S.S.F. data continuously on the same tape. It is not possible to rewind the tape for overwriting during the  
recording.  
If the tape is rewound in the middle of a recording, or after similar operation is performed, be sure to use the Scene End Cue  
Up function in order to ensure that new data are recorded in continuation of the existing data.  
ꢀ See “About the Scene End Cue Up Function” on page 69.  
* In the S.S.F. mode, the STBY/SAVE switch does not activate the VTR save mode. (The save mode is activated by a long  
pause.)  
65  
66  
10. S.S.F. (Super Scene Finder) FUNCTION  
10. S.S.F. (Super Scene Finder) FUNCTION  
10-3 Deleting S.S.F. Data  
10-2 How to Use the S.S.F. Function  
The S.S.F. data recorded in the unit's memory can be deleted  
in the record mode and the record-pause mode.  
This function is only valid in the MARK mode.  
OPERATE/WARNING  
Ⅲ In the record mode, press the NG button after the IN point or  
OUT point has been stored.  
LIGHT  
ON  
OFF  
MODE  
RM  
VTR  
RESET  
MONITOR  
INCOM  
MIC  
SELECT  
COUNTER  
CTL  
TC  
UB  
FILTER  
3200k  
5600k+1/8ND  
5600k+1/64ND  
CH-1  
CARBON  
DYNAMIC  
ALARM  
MIX  
CH-2  
1
2
3
INCOM  
MIC  
ON  
LEVEL  
SHUTTER STATUS  
MENU  
MONITOR  
•
When pressed after the IN point has been stored, the S.S.F.  
data of the scene being recorded are deleted. When  
pressed after the OUT point has been stored, the S.S.F.  
data of the immediately preceding scene are deleted.  
When the NG button is used for deleting operation, the  
next scene number is updated to a new number.  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
VF  
AUTO  
FRONT  
REAR  
MANUAL  
AUDIO SELECT  
AUDIO INPUT  
OFF  
CH-1 AUDIO CH-2  
LEVEL  
CALL  
AUTO IRIS  
F
U
L
L
A
U
T
O
B
L
A
C
K
LOLUX  
BACK  
NORMAL  
SPOT  
L
STRETCH  
RM  
OFF  
DC IN  
/BATT.  
NORMAL  
COMPRESS  
L
POWER  
NG  
OPERATE  
ON  
OFF  
OFF ZEBRA  
SKIN  
AREA  
Ⅲ In the record-pause mode, press the NG button.  
The S.S.F. data of the immediately preceding scene are  
deleted.  
AUTO  
ON  
WHITE  
NG button  
ACCU  
FOCUS  
VTR  
AUDIO  
TAKE  
LEVEL CH-1  
TAKE button  
Note:  
The NG button is only valid for the immediately preceding  
scene. The erase of scene data by the NG button cannot  
be confirmed on the unit.  
VTR trigger button  
MARK Mode  
1. Set the S.S.F. mode as MARK mode.  
Set the VCR Setup Menu item No. 398 S.S.F. MODE to  
"MARK".  
CUE Mode  
1. Set the S.S.F. mode as CUE mode.  
Set the VCR Setup Menu item No. 398 S.S.F. MODE to  
"CUE".  
ꢀ See page 75.  
ꢀ See page 75.  
•
The MARK mode is indicated in the lower part of the  
Status 1 screen in the viewfinder.  
•
The CUE mode is indicated in the lower part of the Status  
1 screen in the viewfinder.  
10-4 Resetting S.S.F. Data  
ACCU - FOCUS  
ACCU - FOCUS  
Operation  
G
F
G
F
1. Press the STOP button to enter the stop mode.  
LOG  
REW  
STOP  
FF  
PLAY  
STILL  
I
I
SD  
B
SD  
B
2. Press the RESET button while the LOG button is kept  
CUE mode  
Number of memorized  
scenes  
* This indicator is not  
indicating the number  
of the CUE point.  
pressed.  
MARK mode  
CH1 -  
CH2 -  
-
-
-
-
<
-
-
- + -  
- + -  
6 0  
-
-
CH1 -  
CH2 -  
-
-
-
-
<
-
-
- + -  
- + -  
6 0  
-
-
Number of  
memorized  
scenes  
2. LOG button  
1. STOP button  
•
All the S.S.F. data held in the memory are erased.  
However, the reel number is not cleared.  
M : 099  
1 2 . 4V  
F5 . 6  
STBY  
C : 099  
1 2 . 4V  
F5 . 6  
STBY  
2. Press the VTR trigger button to start the recording.  
2. Press the VTR trigger button to start the recording.  
OPERATE/WARNING  
LIGHT  
ON  
OFF  
MODE  
RM  
VTR  
RESET  
MONITOR  
INCOM  
MIC  
SELECT  
COUNTER  
CTL  
TC  
UB  
FILTER  
3200k  
5600k+1/8ND  
5600k+1/64ND  
CH-1  
3. When you reach the scene that you want to memorize, press  
CARBON  
DYNAMIC  
ALARM  
MIX  
CH-2  
1
2
3
3. When you reach the point that you want to memorize as  
INCOM  
MIC  
ON  
LEVEL  
SHUTTER STATUS  
MENU  
MONITOR  
the TAKE button.  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
AUTO  
FRONT  
REAR  
MANUAL  
the CUE point, press the TAKE button.  
AUDIO SELECT  
AUDIO INPUT  
OFF  
•
The time code data of the point where the TAKE button is  
pressed is stored in the unit's memory as the start point  
of the scene.  
CH-1 AUDIO CH-2  
LEVEL  
CALL  
AUTO IRIS  
F
U
L
L
A
U
T
O
B
L
A
C
K
LOLUX  
BACK  
NORMAL  
SPOT  
L
STRETCH  
•
The time code data of the point where the TAKE button is  
pressed is stored in the unit's memory as CUE data.  
The LOG button’s LED lights during memorization of the  
CUE point and the “∗” mark is shown in the viewfinder.  
RM  
OFF  
DC IN  
/BATT.  
NORMAL  
COMPRESS  
L
POWER  
NG  
OPERATE  
ON  
OFF  
4. When you reach the scene that you want to memorize as  
the ending point, press the TAKE button again.  
Ⅲ Press the TAKE button each time you reach a point that  
•
The time code data of the point where the TAKE button is  
pressed is stored in the unit's memory as the ending point  
of the scene.  
The LOG button’s LED lights during memorization of the  
IN point and the “∗” mark is shown in the viewfinder.  
The LOG button’s LED remains off during memorization  
of the OUT point and the “∗” mark is not shown in the  
viewfinder.  
you want to memorize as CUE data.  
2. RESET button  
4. Stop the recording.  
•
Press the VTR trigger button.  
Ⅲ For each scene that you want to memorize, repeat steps  
3. and 4.  
5. Stop the recording.  
Press the VTR trigger button.  
Note:  
•
Once a tape with recorded S.S.F. data is rewound but not ejected before playback or recording is performed on it again, the  
previous S.S.F.data cannot be automatically erased when S.S.F.data are recorded (when you overwrite the previous image).  
Therefore, the S.S.F. data of the overlapped sections will not correspond to the video image.  
Furthermore, please note that the time code data may differ from the actual data if recording is started in the CUE mode in  
this situation.  
67  
68  
10. S.S.F. (Super Scene Finder) FUNCTION  
11. USING EXTERNAL COMPONENTS  
10-5 Writing S.S.F. Data to Tape  
11-1 Connecting a Video Component with DV Connector  
S.S.F. data stored in the unitís memory can be written to the  
beginning of tape.  
Rear section of GY-DV550  
LOG  
REW  
STOP  
FF  
PLAY  
STILL  
Precautions when writing S.S.F. data  
•
When S.S.F. data stored in the memory of the GY-DV550  
is written to the beginning of the rewound tape,  
approximately 5 seconds of recorded video and/or sound  
will be erased at the beginning.  
1.STOP button  
2.LOG button  
2.REW button  
In the case of important recordings, leave 5 seconds or  
more of the tape unrecorded before starting recording.  
Writing of S.S.F. data should be done with the DC cable  
disconnected.  
Video component with DV Connector  
DV connector  
•
DV LINE  
MIC  
+48V  
ON  
LINE  
MIC  
+48V  
ON  
INTERCOM  
OPERATE/WARNING  
RESET  
LIGHT  
MODE  
RM  
VTR  
ON  
FRONT  
DC INPUT  
EARPHONE  
OFF  
AUDIO IN  
REAR  
MONITOR  
INCOM  
SELECT  
COUNTER  
MIC  
DC  
OUTPUT  
FILTER  
3200k  
CH-1  
CTL  
TC  
UB  
CARBON  
DYNAMIC  
ALARM  
MIX  
CH-2  
1
2
3
5600k+1/8ND  
5600k+1/64ND  
INCOM  
Operation  
MIC  
ON  
LEVEL  
SHUTTER STATUS  
MENU  
MONITOR  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
AUTO  
FRONT  
REAR  
MANUAL  
AUDIO SELECT  
AUDIO INPUT  
OFF  
CH-1 AUDIO CH-2  
LEVEL  
CALL  
AUTO IRIS  
F
U
L
L
A
U
T
O
B
L
A
C
K
LOLUX  
DV connector  
BACK  
NORMAL  
SPOT  
L
STRETCH  
RM  
OFF  
DC IN  
/BATT.  
1. Press the STOP button to enter the stop mode.  
NORMAL  
COMPRESS  
L
POWER  
NG  
OPERATE  
2. Press the REW button while the LOG button is kept pressed.  
ON  
OFF  
•
•
•
The REW indicator blinks during tape transport in the  
writing position.  
DV cable  
When connecting the GY-DV550 to other component with DV connector, be sure to observe the following procedure.  
The LOG indicator lights while S.S.F. data are being  
written to the tape.  
When writing to the tape is completed, the LOG indicator  
goes out.  
AUDIO  
LEVEL  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
AUTO  
FRONT  
REAR  
MANUAL  
AUDIO SELECT  
AUDIO INPUT  
VTR SELECT  
TC GENE.  
SEE  
CONTINUE MENU  
Ⅲ When using the GY-DV550 as recording component  
Ⅲ When using the GY-DV550 as playback component  
INSTR-  
UCTION  
MANUAL  
INT  
PARA  
EXT  
REC  
PRST  
REGEN  
FREE  
LITHIUM BATT.  
GROUP  
HOLD  
ITEM  
SHIFT  
SELECT DATA SET  
ADVANCE PRESET  
CAM AUX  
1. Turn ON both units.  
1. Turn ON both units.  
About the Scene End Cue Up Function  
VTR INPUT  
2. Confirm that the VCR Setup Menu item No.126 INPUT  
2. Set VCR Setup menu No. 257 AUDIO REF. SIGNAL LEV.  
For proper E-E audio output, set the VCR Setup Menu No.  
257 to the audio reference level of the tape on the player (-  
12 dB or -20 dB).  
Ⅲ When the CONTINUE button is pressed while the LOG  
button is kept pressed in the stop mode, the tape winds  
to the S.S.F. data’s last OUT point, after which the unit  
enters the record-pause mode. (Scene End Cue Up)  
The FF button’s LED blinks during the Scene End Cue  
Up mode.  
CONTINUE button  
SELECT is set to “CAMERA”(cA).  
* If set to “IEEE1394”, set it to “CAMERA” and then turn  
ON the power again.  
Memo:  
3. Insert the videocassette.  
When VCR Setup menu No. 126 INPUT SELECT is set  
to IEEE1394, No.257 AUDIO REF.SIGNAL LEV setting  
cannot be changed.  
4. Connect the DV cable.  
Note:  
* Always connect the DV cable last.  
Once a tape with recorded S.S.F. data is ejected and then  
reinserted again, the previous data will be erased if new  
S.S.F. data are recorded on the tape.  
Memo:  
3. Set the VCR Setup Menu item No.126 INPUT SELECT to  
•
When the GY-DV550 is controlled through the DV  
connector, set the VCR Setup Menu item No.050  
REMOTE SELECT to “IEEE1394”.  
However, the following functions may not work  
depending on the component that the GY-DV550 is  
connected to.  
“IEEE1394”(iE).  
4. Insert the videocassette.  
10-6 Outputting S.S.F. Data  
5. Connect the DV cable.  
* Always connect the DV cable last.  
The S.S.F. data in the memory of the main unit or that recorded  
at the beginning of the tape can be output via the REMOTE  
connector using the RS-232C controller.  
For how to make connections for this, refer to “Connecting a  
PC” on page 71.  
REC  
Operation  
Memo:  
FF (FWD search is possible)  
Ⅲ When recording in the S.S.F. mode is completed, and the  
cassette tape has not been taken out, the S.S.F. data stored  
in the memory of the GY-DV550 are output when the RS-  
232C command D5h is received.  
REW (REV search is possible)  
•
When recording while controlling the GY-DV550  
through the DV connector from another component  
with DV connector, set the VCR Setup Menu item  
No.050 REMOTE SELECT to “IEEE1394”.  
In this case, it takes approximately 2 to 3 seconds  
before recording starts on the GY-DV550.  
The audio recording level to the tape constitutes an  
input signal reference level regardless of setting the  
VCR Setup Menu No. 257 AUDIO REF. SIGNAL LEV.  
•
•
When the DV cable is connected for communication  
with another component, to stabilize the IEEE1394  
output signal, the STILL mode is activated for a few  
seconds and the LED of the STILL button on the top  
section of the GY-DV550 lights when the mode is  
switched to PLAY or x1 FWD search.  
Operation  
Ⅲ If the tape recorded in S.S.F.mode is ejected and then loaded  
again, the GY-DV550 rewinds the tape to the beginning and  
plays back for about 10 seconds when it receives the RS-  
232C command D5h.  
During the playback, the model lD data and reel number  
recorded on the tape are read. If corresponding S.S.F. data  
are found in the memory, these data are output.  
If corresponding S.S.F.data are not found in the memory, the  
tape is rewound to the beginning once more, and after about  
20 seconds of slow playback the stop mode is entered.  
During slow playback, if S.S.F. data are written at the  
beginning of the tape, these data are read out, and after the  
stop mode is entered the S.S.F. data are output.  
∗ If S.S.F. data does not exist, the 05h (NOT TARGET)  
command is output.  
In the stopped condition, the GY-DV550 answers with the S.S.F.  
data when it receives the RS-232C command D5h “S.S.F. DATA  
SENSE” from the PC.  
(Indication example)  
START  
•
∗ The x1 FWD search only works during IEEE1394  
control or RS-232C control.  
The operation method differs with the characteristics  
and specifications of the connected equipment. Even  
if connection is possible, operation or data  
communication may sometimes be impossible to  
perform.  
ID NO: 2c97  
REEL NO: 1818  
Ⅲ When the GY-DV550 is used as camera, and a backup  
recording is made on another component via the DV  
connector, set the VCR Setup Menu item No.126 INPUT  
SELECT to “CAMERA”.  
SCENE  
001M  
002M  
003C  
004C  
004C  
004C  
END  
MARK IN  
MARK OUT  
CUE  
00:00:00:16 00:00:04:19  
00:00:06:03 00:00:08:08  
00:03:15:17 00:03:57:00  
00:03:58:18 00:05:37:24 00:04:00:21  
00:03:58:18 00:05:37:24 00:04:07:22  
00:03:58:18 00:05:37:24 00:04:18:23  
Note:  
If the above procedure is not performed correctly, the playback picture may be disturbed or the sound may fall out. If this  
happens, redo the connection by performing steps 1. to 4. described above.  
69  
70  
11. USING EXTERNAL COMPONENTS  
12. SETUP MENU  
11-2 Connecting a PC  
12-1 VCR Setup Menu  
The setup menus for the VCR section can be set while observing the menu in the viewfinder and on the unit's counter display.  
The set contents are stored in the memory and retained even after the power is switched OFF.  
PUSH  
VCR SETUP MENU CONFIGURATION  
The VCR Setup Menu is a two-layer construction.  
DV CAMCORDER  
VTR/RM  
GY-DV550  
The VCR Setup Menu consists of five group menus divided according to functions. When a Group menu is selected, the menu's  
Item menu opens. Each Item menu contains one or several items, and the various items can be set individually as required.  
PROMPTER  
OUTPUT  
RS-232C  
GENLOCK/AUX IN  
VIDEO OUT  
CLH-I1NE OUT  
CH-2  
Y/C OUT MONITOR OUT  
REMOTE  
AUDIO IN  
FRONT  
TC IN  
TC OUT  
LENS  
VCR Setup Menu  
PC  
TTL RS-232C  
converter cable  
RS-232C  
Group Name  
Item Menu Contents  
DV connector  
REMOTE connector  
(Optional VC-P893)  
AUDIO IN  
000  
SERVO/SYSTEM  
Selection of remote control to control the unit  
Selection of advance amount in STILL mode  
Selection of BACK TALLY lamp lighting pattern  
AUDIO OUT  
VIDEO IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
connector  
100  
200  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
Selection of Video input  
Non-linear editing controller  
Selection of low cut for audio input signals  
Selection of sampling frequency for audio input signals  
Selection of front section audio volume control  
Selection of standard recording level  
DV connector  
Perform the following settings when connecting the unit to a Non-linear editing controller, etc.  
300  
SYSTEM  
Selection of amount of back space for recording pause  
Selection of long pause/still duration  
Selection of battery type  
Selection of S.S.F. (Super Scene Finder) mode  
Selection of operation during FF/REW remote signal reception  
Connections  
Connect the GY-DV550’s VTR REMOTE connector to the RS-232C connector on the PC or the non-linear editing controller using  
the TTL ⇔ RS-232C converter cable.  
400  
TIME CODE  
Selection of user's bit during slave loking to time code  
Selection of time code framing mode (U MODEL)  
Or connect the GY-DV550’s DV connector and the DV connector of the non-linear editing controller using a DV cable.  
For compatible non-linear editing controller, consult with your JVC dealer.  
500  
HM  
ON SCREEN  
Selection of counter display method (Time code/Date/Time)  
Display of hour meter (accumulated running time of head drum)  
HOUR METER  
Settings  
•
•
To remote control the PC or non-linear editing controller by means of RS-232C, set the VCR Setup Menu item No. 050 REMOTE  
SELECT to "IEEE1394+RS232C". ꢀ See page 74.  
Item Menu  
(example: AUDIO)  
Viewfinder display  
Group Menu  
To remote control the GY-DV550’s VCR using the DV connector’s IEEE1394 option, set the VCR Setup Menu item No. 050  
REMOTE SELECT to “IEEE1394”. ꢀ See page 74.  
00 0 : SERVO / SYSTEM  
24 4 : LOW CUT  
Note:  
OFF  
48K  
10 0 : V I DEO  
MENU button  
MENU button  
SELECT button  
MENU button  
20 0 : AUD I O  
24 5 : SAMPLE RATE  
•
•
When a cable is connected to the REMOTE connector, the VTR Setup Menu is not displayed in the viewfinder. Make settings  
on the VTR Setup Menu while the cable is not connected.  
When a cable is connected to the REMOTE connector, the VCR operation mode will not be displayed correctly on the  
Status 1 screen in the viewfinder.  
30 0 : SYSTEM  
4 0 0 : T I ME CODE  
50 0 : ON SCREEN  
246 : CH1 FRONT VR ENABLE  
ENABLE  
257 : AUD I O REF . S I GNAL LEV  
-20dB  
HM  
: HOUR METER  
Ⅲ The S.S.F. data stored in the memory of the unit or at the beginning of the tape can be output through the REMOTE terminal.  
ꢀ See page 69.  
DATA SET button  
For servicing  
See the service manual page 1-23,  
“1.14 SERVICE MENU (VCR)”.  
←
71  
72  
12. SETUP MENU  
12. SETUP MENU  
12-1 VCR Setup Menu (Cont'd)  
12-1 VCR Setup Menu (Cont'd)  
VCR SETUP MENU CONTENTS  
DISPLAYING AND SETTING VCR SETUP MENUS  
Setting  
Value  
Item  
Factory  
Setting  
Group  
Contents  
Upper row: Viewfinder display  
Lower row: Counter display indication  
AUDIO  
LEVEL  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
AUTO  
FRONT  
REAR  
MANUAL  
SERVO  
/SYSTEM  
050:  
REMOTE SELECT  
LOCAL  
IEEE1394  
IEEE1394+  
RS232C  
Selection of the method for remote control of the VCR. LOCAL  
LOCAL : Choose this setting when the VCR should  
be controlled using the operation buttons on  
the GY-DV550 only.  
OPERATE/WARNING  
LIGHT  
ON  
OFF  
MODE  
RM  
VTR  
RESET  
AUDIO SELECT  
VTR SELECT TC GENE.  
AUDIO INPUT  
MONITOR  
INCOM  
MIC  
SELECT  
COUNTER  
CTL  
TC  
UB  
FILTER  
3200k  
CH-1  
CARBON  
DYNAMIC  
ALARM  
MIX  
CH-2  
1
2
3
SEE  
CONTINUE  
REC  
FREE  
MENU  
5600k+1/8ND  
5600k+1/64ND  
INSTR-  
UCTION  
MANUAL  
INT  
PRST  
REGEN  
INCOM  
PARA  
EXT  
MIC  
ON  
LEVEL  
SHUTTER STATUS  
MENU  
MONITOR  
1.  
6.  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
AUTO  
FRONT  
REAR  
MANUAL  
LITHIUM BATT.  
GROUP  
HOLD  
ITEM  
SHIFT  
SELECT  
DATA SET  
AUDIO SELECT  
AUDIO INPUT  
OFF  
CAM AUX  
AUDIO  
CH-2  
LEVEL  
CH-1  
IEEE1394  
:
Choose this setting when the VCR should be  
remote controlled from a DV connector equipped  
video component connected to the DV  
connector on the rear section of the GY-DV550.  
ADVANCE PRESET  
CA
AUTO IRIS  
F
U
L
L
A
U
T
O
B
L
A
C
K
LOLUX  
BACK  
NORMAL  
SPOT  
L
STRETCH  
RM  
OFF  
DC IN  
/BATT.  
NORMAL  
COMPRESS  
L
rnSL  
Lc  
IE  
23  
VTR INPUT  
POWER  
NG  
OPERATE  
ON  
OFF  
2. 4. 3.5.  
IEEE1394+RS232C :  
Choose this setting for control by means of  
the VCR remote control signal from the  
REMOTE connector on the GY-DV550.  
“MENU” indication  
Note:  
•
The operation buttons on the GY-DV550 remain effective  
even when set to IEEE1394 or IEEE1394+RS232C.  
Viewfinder  
FRAME  
052:  
STEP SLOW MODE  
BACKTALLY MODE  
FIELD  
Selects the advance amount in STILL mode.  
(Frame/Field advance is effective only with the external  
remote control signal.)  
1. Engaging the VCR Setup Menu mode.  
FRAME  
0 00 : SERVO / SYSTEM  
1 00 : V I DEO  
2 00 : AUD I O  
3 00 : SYSTEM  
4 00 : T IME CODE  
Press the MENU button.  
StEP  
Fd  
FM  
•
The "MENU" indication in the display section starts  
blinking and the VCR Setup Menu appears in the  
viewfinder and on the counter display.  
FIELD  
: Field-by-field advance.  
FRAME : Frame-by-frame advance.  
5 00 : ON SCREEN  
HM  
: HOUR METER  
082:  
rtMd  
OFF  
ON  
BLINK  
Selection of the lighting pattern of the BACKTALLY lamp BLINK  
on the rear section during recording.  
Note:  
OFF  
ON  
: The lamp is always off.  
:
The lamp lights during recording. It remains off until  
theVTR trigger button is pressed to start the recording.  
The lamp lights during recording. It blinks when the  
VTR trigger button is pressed to start the recording.  
When a cable is connected to the REMOTE connector,  
the VTR Setup Menu is not displayed in the viewfinder.  
oF  
on  
bL  
GROUP menu screen  
Counter display  
BLINK  
:
126: INPUT SELECT  
CAMERA  
IEEE1394  
cA, iE  
Selection of the input video signal.  
Settings cannot be changed during recording.  
CAMERA : Camera image is input.  
IEEE1394 : The image from the DV connector equipped  
video component connected to the DV  
connector on the rear section is input.  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
CAMERA  
2. Selecting the GROUP.  
Press the GROUP button.  
vid  
Note:  
•
Each time the GROUP button is pressed the selected  
GROUP number is shown blinking on the viewfinder  
screen. The counter display shows the selected group.  
The setting of this item can only be changed in  
the stop mode or when a cassette is not loaded.  
2 4 4 : LOW CUT  
OFF  
244: LOW CUT  
OFF  
CH1  
CH2  
To select whether or not the low frequencies of the audio OFF  
signal from the audio input connectors are cut. Set to  
ON to reduce the wind noise of the microphone.  
2 45 : SAMPLE RATE  
4 8K  
2 46 : CH1 FRONT VR ENABLE  
3. Open the Item menu of the selected GROUP.  
Press the SELECT button.  
CH1 & CH2 OFF  
CH1  
:
The CH1 and CH2 low frequencies are not cut.  
2 57 : AUD I O REF . S I GNAL LEV  
- 2 0dB  
: Only the low frequencies of the audio signal  
input to the CH1 channel are cut.  
4. Selecting the Item.  
Press the ITEM button.  
LctF  
oF  
01  
02  
on  
32K  
48K  
CH2  
: Only the low frequencies of the audio signal  
input to the CH2 channel are cut.  
CH1& CH2: The low frequencies are cut for both CH1  
•
Each time the ITEM button is pressed the selected item  
number is shown blinking on the viewfinder screen.The  
counter display shows the selected item.  
Item menu screen  
and CH2.  
245: SAMPLING RATE  
To select the sampling rate for digital PCM audio recording 48K  
of the tape (both CH1 and CH2).  
5. Changing the setting value of the item.  
32K  
48K  
:
:
Digital recording occurs with 12-bit, 32 kHz sampling  
Digital recording occurs with 16-bit 48 kHz sampling.  
Press the SELECT button and select the setting value.  
snPL  
32  
48  
Ⅲ
When multiple items should be set, repeat the operations  
*
The DV format offers recording tracks for up to 4  
channel when recording using 12-bit, 32 kHz sampling.  
The GY-DV550 records two of these tracks. The GY-  
DV550 does not allow after-recording.  
Note:  
of steps 4. and 5.  
The setting of this item can only be changed in  
the stop mode or when a cassette is not loaded.  
Ⅲ
To set menu items in other groups, press the MENU  
button. When the relevant group menu is displayed,  
perform the setting.  
To select whether or not the front section audio input level  
control should be operative. The front section audio input  
level control only affects the audio signal recorded on CH1.  
DISABLE : Use of the front section audio input level  
control is disabled.  
ENABLE : Use of the front section audio input level  
control is enabled.  
* The CH-1 audio input level control on the side section  
works regardless of the setting.  
246: CH1 FRONT VR  
ENABLE  
DISABLE  
ENABLE  
ENABLE  
DATA SET  
Ⅲ
When the GROUP button is pressed, the items of the  
higher order group menu are displayed.  
FruL  
oF  
on  
6. Saving the setting value.  
DATA SET display  
Press the DATA SET button.  
•
"DATA SET" appears in the viewfinder and on the counter  
display and the setting value is saved in the GY-DV550's  
memory.The display returns to the normal screen mode  
when data has been saved.  
To set the reference recording level of the tape (both  
CH1 and CH2). Playback should also be made with the  
setting used during recording.  
-20dB  
-20dB  
-12dB  
257: AUDIO REF.  
SIGNAL LEV  
20  
12  
ArEF  
-20dB  
-12dB  
:
:
Records with -20dB as the reference recording level.  
Records with -12dB as the reference recording level.  
Use this setting when playing back the tape using a  
consumer-oriented DV player.  
Ⅲ
If the MENU button is pressed without pressing the DATA  
SET button, the display returns to the normal screen  
mode without the setting value being changed.  
Note:  
When No. 126 INPUT SELECT is set to  
IEEE1394, this item cannot be changed.  
*
The recording level of the IEEE 1394 signal has nothing to do with it.  
73  
74  
12. SETUP MENU  
12. SETUP MENU  
12-1 VCR Setup Menu (Cont'd)  
12-2 Camera Menu Screen Flow  
Camera Menu Screen Flow  
As illustrated below, the Camera Menu is a menu screen comprising several layers.The first layer of the CAMERA MENU screen is  
for choosing and setting the menus required in accordance with functions or purposes.  
The unit also allows the contents of menu settings to be stored in three files (SCENE FILE A, B, OFF).  
Setting  
Item  
Factory  
Setting  
Value  
Group  
Contents  
Upper row: Viewfinder display  
Lower row: Counter display indication  
• SCENE FILE A, B.....  
By performing the FILE STORE operation on  
the FILE MANAGE screen, the contents of  
menu settings can be stored and retained in  
the unit. However, the SET UP menu  
contents are stored even if the FILE STORE  
SYSTEM  
302: BACK SPACE  
b-SP  
STANDARD Selection of amount of back space for recording pause. STAND-  
QUICK  
STANDARD: Normally use this setting.  
ARD  
30MIN  
12V  
QUICK  
:
Compared to STANDARD, the back space  
becomes approximately 0.4 seconds shorter.  
Use this setting when you want to start  
shooting quickly. However, in the REGEN  
mode, the time code may not continue.  
St  
qU  
-
-
-
VF D I SPLAY  
-
-
-
operation is not performed.  
SCENE F I LE  
A
F . NO / F I LTER  
AUD I O D I SPLAY  
SAFETY ZONE  
CENTER MARK  
REC T I ME  
: OFF  
: OFF  
: NORMAL  
: ON  
: REMA I N  
: 70 - 8 0%  
Use SCENE FILE A or B to store and retain  
the contents of menu settings that remain  
more or less fixed.  
307: LONG PAUSE  
TIME  
3MIN  
30MIN  
To select the time (minutes) before the tape protect mode (drum head rotation  
stopped) is engaged when the record-pause, still or stop condition continues.  
3MIN : 3 minutes  
30MIN : 30 minutes  
* When used in a cold environment, the setting will be  
3 minutes regardless of the setting.  
ZEBRA  
• SCENE FILE OFF.....  
LGPt  
03  
30  
PAGE BACK  
Whenever you want to change the menu  
settings, use this SCENE FILE.  
The menu setting contents are stored in the  
unit even if the FILE STORE operation is not  
performed.  
396: BATTERY TYPE  
bAtt  
12V  
13.2V  
14.4V  
CAUTION:  
-
-
-
OPERAT I ON  
-
-
-
To be set in accordance with the used battery back type.  
12V  
: Choose this setting when using 12V battery  
(12V DC Flat shape type).  
SCENE F I LE  
ASPECT RAT I O  
SHUTTER  
FAW  
A
When controlling the unit with the  
camera remote control unit,  
REMOVE will appear in the setting  
value section.  
In this case, menu settings cannot  
be made.  
: 4 : 3  
: STEP  
: NONE  
: 0 dB  
: 9d B  
: 18dB  
13.2V : Choose this setting when using 13.2V battery  
(Anton-Bauer Trimpack 13, Propack 13,  
Magnum 13, Compack 13).  
14.4V : Choose this setting when using 14.4V battery  
(Anton-Bauer Trimpack 14, Propack 14,  
Magnum 14, Compack 14).  
When shooting, select the file with the menu settings  
to be used from among the three SCENE FILE files  
on the CAMERA MENU screen.  
GA I N  
GA I N  
GA I N  
L
M
H
12  
13  
14  
SMOOTH TRANS  
SPOT L / BACK  
PAGE BACK  
: OFF  
: M IDDLE  
L
Cursor  
Note:  
-
-
-
CAMERA MENU  
-
-
-
-
-
-
PROCESS  
-
-
-
-
-
-
ADVANCED PROCESS  
SCENE F I LE  
-
-
-
•
•
If this setting is neglected, the unit’s display of remaining of battery  
power and generation of battery alarm will not work correctly.  
This setting is valid when battery pack is used. It  
is invalid when a DC power supply is used.  
SCENE F I LE  
: A  
SCENE F I LE  
MASTER BLACK  
DETA I L  
DTL . V / H BAL  
DTL . FREQUENCY  
SK I N DTL DETECT  
RESOLUT I ON  
KNEE PO I NT  
ADVANCED PROCESS .  
PAGE BACK  
A
A
VF D I SPLAY MENU .  
.
: NORMAL  
: NORMAL  
: NORMAL  
: MIDDLE  
: OFF  
: NORMAL  
: 100%  
COLOR MATR I X  
GAMMA  
: ON  
: NORMA L  
OPERAT I ON MENU .  
PROCESS MENU .  
F I LE MANAGE .  
SETUP MENU .  
.
.
SK I N COLOR ADJUST .  
.
.
PAGE BACK  
.
398: SSF MODE  
SSF  
OFF  
OFF  
Selection of the S.S.F. (Super Scene Finder) mode.  
S.S.F. function:While recording, the time code data of a  
desired recorded scene is stored in the unit's memory  
when the TAKE button on the front section is pressed.  
Settings cannot be changed during recording or SAVE mode.  
T I ME DATE MENU .  
EX I T  
.
V
CUE MODE  
MARK MODE  
.
oF  
cU  
nr  
-
-
-
F I LE MANAGE  
-
-
-
OFF  
: S.S.F. function is not available.  
SCENE F I LE  
A
CUE MODE : Selects the CUE mode.  
Normal screen  
STORE F I LE  
STORE  
RESET F I LE  
: A  
: OFF  
When the TAKE button is pressed, the time code data of  
the scene recorded at that point is stored in the memory.  
RESET  
MARK MODE: Selects the MARK mode.  
PAGE BACK  
STORE OK?  
When the TAKE button is pressed the first time, the time  
code of this point is stored as start point of the scene.When  
the TAKE button is pressed the second time, the time code  
of this point is stored as ending point of the scene.  
For details on the S.S.F. function, see page 66.  
-
-
SK I N COLOR ADJUST  
-
-
-
-
-
SETUP -  
-
-
•
When theVCR Setup Menu item No.398 S.S.F.MODE  
is set to CUE or MARK, the time code generator’s  
running method is internally set to the REGEN mode.  
26P I N OUT  
CHARACTER M I X  
SET UP  
PHASE  
SC COARSE  
SC I NE  
PAGE BACK  
: CPN  
: OFF  
: ON  
: 128  
: 0  
(U MODEL)  
H
399: REMOTE FF/REW FF/REW  
Specifies the operation when FF/REW signal is received FF/  
F
: 128  
MODE  
SEARCH  
FF  
SH  
from the remote connector during playback.  
FF/REW : FF/REW operation performed.  
SEARCH : Search operation performed.  
REW  
ERORR  
SK I N COLOR DET .  
SK I N COLOR RANGE  
PAGE BACK  
STOP  
: NORMAL  
rEFF  
TC  
TIME CODE  
403: U-BIT SLAVE  
UbSc  
TC&UB  
TC  
on  
oF  
To set whether user’s bits also should be slave-locked  
when slave-locking with external time code generator.  
TC&UB : User’s bits also slave-locked  
-
-
-
T I ME DATE  
-
-
-
D I SPLAY  
: ON  
TC  
: User’s bits are not slave-locked  
D I SPLAY MODE  
D I SP STYLE  
DATE STYLE  
T I ME STYLE  
SEC D I SPLAY  
PAGE BACK  
: BARS+CAM  
: DATE&T I ME  
: MM/ DD / YY  
: 24HOUR  
DROP  
Selection of the time code generator's framing mode as  
either drop or non-drop mode.  
DROP  
416: NON DROP/  
DROP (U MODEL)  
: OFF  
NON DROP  
DROP  
:
The internal time code generator runs in drop mode.  
Choose this setting when emphasizing the recorded time.  
dF  
nF  
tcG  
NON DROP: The internal time code generator runs in non drop mode.  
Choose this setting when emphasizing the frame number.  
Selection of the appearance of the counter display when  
ON  
SCREEN  
TC  
TC  
516: DISPLAY SELECT  
diSP  
the COUNTER switch is set to “TC” or “UB”.  
CLOCK  
TC  
: The time code is displayed.  
tc  
cL  
CLOCK: The date/time is displayed.  
75  
76  
12. SETUP MENU  
12. SETUP MENU  
12-3 How to Select from the Camera Menu  
12-4 VF Display Screen  
1. Press the STATUS button for 1 second to display the  
Item  
Function, Operation  
Variation Range Initial Setting  
CAMERA MENU screen in the viewfinder.  
F.NO/FILTER  
Sets whether to display the F-number of the lens iris or filter position of F.NO  
OFF  
2. Choose the file with the camera menu settings to be used.  
OPERATE/WARNING  
the unit on status screen 1.  
FILTER  
OFF  
LIGHT  
ON  
OFF  
MODE  
RM  
VTR  
RESET  
(SCENE FILE A, B or OFF)  
MONITOR  
INCOM  
MIC  
SELECT  
COUNTER  
CTL  
TC  
UB  
F. NO ..................... F-number is displayed.  
FILTER .................. Filter position is displayed.  
OFF....................... No display  
FILTER  
3200k  
CH-1  
MIX  
CH-2  
CARBON  
DYNAMIC  
ALARM  
1
2
3
5600k+1/8ND  
5600k+1/64ND  
1
Turn the SHUTTER dial up or down to align the cursor  
with SCENE FILE, and then press the SHUTTER dial  
in the direction of the arrow.  
INCOM  
MIC  
ON  
LEVEL  
SHUTTER STATUS  
MENU  
MONITOR  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
AUTO  
FRONT  
REAR  
MANUAL  
AUDIO SELECT  
AUDIO INPUT  
OFF  
CH-1 AUDIO CH-2  
LEVEL  
CALL  
AUTO IRIS  
F
U
L
L
A
U
T
O
B
L
A
C
K
LOLUX  
BACK  
NORMAL  
SPOT  
L
STRETCH  
RM  
OFF  
DC IN  
/BATT.  
NORMAL  
COMPRESS  
L
POWER  
•
The area with the setting value starts blinking, and the  
value can now be changed.  
NG  
OPERATE  
ON  
OFF  
AUDIO  
DISPLAY  
Selects whether or not the audio indicator is displayed on the Status 1 ON  
OFF  
2
Turn the SHUTTER dial up or down to select the setting  
value. (A, B or OFF)  
Press the SHUTTER dial in the direction of the arrow.  
The setting value stops blinking but remains lit.  
screen.  
OFF  
ON ........................ Audio indicator is displayed.  
OFF....................... Audio indicator is not displayed.  
STATUS button  
3
•
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 8.  
SHUTTER dial  
3. Turn the SHUTTER dial up or down to align the cursor with  
the menu item to be set, and then press the SHUTTER dial  
in the direction of the arrow.  
SAFETY ZONE Selects the safety zone setting.  
OFF  
NORMAL  
16:9  
OFF  
ON  
SHUTTER  
ꢀ See "Safety Zone" on page 31.  
•
The selected menu screen appears in the viewfinder.  
4. Choose the menu item from the menu screen.  
Turn the SHUTTER dial up or down to align the cursor with  
the menu item to be set, and then press the SHUTTER dial  
in the direction of the arrow.  
MENU  
CENTER  
MARK  
Selects whether or not a center mark is shown during display of safety  
zone.  
ON  
OFF  
•
The area with the setting value starts blinking, and the  
value can now be changed.  
ON ........................ Center mark displayed.  
OFF....................... Center mark not displayed.  
When the SAFETY ZONE item is set to OFF, "---" is displayed and this  
item cannot be set.  
CURSOR Item  
Setting value  
5. Change the setting value.  
- - - CAMERA MENU - - -  
Turn the SHUTTER dial up or down to change the setting  
value, and then press the SHUTTER dial in the direction of  
the arrow.  
SCENE F I LE  
VF D I SPLAY MENU .  
OPERAT I ON MENU .  
PROCESS MENU .  
: A  
.
REC TIME  
Sets whether the remaining tape recording time or TIME CODE is  
displayed on the Status 1 screen.  
TC ......................... TIME CODE is displayed.  
* The time code is displayed even if the VCR Setup  
Menu item No. 516 DISPLAY SELECT is set to  
“CLOCK”.  
TC  
REMAIN  
REMAIN  
.
•
Ⅲ
The setting value stops blinking but remains lit.  
To change multiple items, repeat steps 4. and 5. above.  
.
F I LE STORE .  
SETUP MENU .  
.
.
T I ME DATE .  
EX I T  
.
6. Return to the CAMERA MENU screen.  
Turn the SHUTTER dial up or down to align the cursor with  
the PAGE BACK item, and then press the SHUTTER dial in  
the direction of the arrow.  
REMAIN ................ Remaining time is displayed.  
Ⅲ
To change the settings of other menu screens, perform  
the operations described in steps 3. to 6. above.  
ZEBRA  
Switches the luminance level of the subject sections where the zebra 70-80%  
70-80%  
CAMERA MENU screen  
pattern is displayed.  
85-95%  
Zebra patterns also displayed when color bar is displayed.  
70-80% ................. Zebra pattern is displayed in sections with luminance OVER100%  
levels between 70% and 80%.  
85-95% ................. Zebra pattern is displayed in sections with luminance  
levels between 85% and 90%.  
OVER 95%............ Zebra pattern is displayed in sections with luminance  
levels over 95%.  
OVER95%  
7. If SCENE FILE A or B is selected, choose the FILE  
MANAGE item from the CAMERA MENU screen and  
perform the operations for storing a file.  
ꢀ See "FILE MANAGE Screen" on page 82.  
* It is not necessary to perform the file storage operations  
for changes made to the SETUP MENU.  
Item  
Setting value  
- - - VF D I SPLAY - - -  
SCENE F I LE  
F . NO / F I LTER  
AUD I O D I SPLAY  
SAFTY ZONE  
CENTER MARK  
REC T I ME  
A
: F. NO  
: ON  
: NORMAL  
: ON  
: REMA I N  
OVER 100%.......... Zebra pattern is displayed in sections with luminance  
levels over 100%.  
8. Complete the CAMERA MENU setting.  
Turn the SHUTTER dial up or down to align the cursor with  
the EXIT item on the CAMERA MENU screen, and then  
press the SHUTTER dial in the direction of the arrow.  
ZEBRA  
PAGE BACK  
: 70  
- 8 0%  
PAGE BACK  
The CAMERA MENU returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed with  
the cursor at this position.  
–
–
•
The normal screen returns in the viewfinder.  
VF DISPLAY MENU screen  
77  
78  
12. SETUP MENU  
12. SETUP MENU  
12-5 OPERATION Screen  
12-6 PROCESS Screen  
Item  
Function, Operation  
Variation Range Initial Setting  
Item  
Function, Operation  
Variation Range Initial Setting  
MASTER  
BLACK  
Adjusts the pedestal level (master black), which is the reference of black. MAX (100)  
NORMAL  
NORMAL  
NORMAL  
LOW  
ASPECT RATIO Sets the image size of the video signal.  
LETTER  
4:3  
4:3  
• To increase the pedestal level...... Increase the number. (UP)  
99  
201  
LETTER ...... LETTER BOX (16:9 aspect ratio) image output.  
4:3 ............... 4:3 aspect ratio image output.  
• To decrease the pedestal level .... Decrease the number. (DOWN)  
gradations  
to  
Note:  
NORMAL (0)  
to  
-99  
MIN (-100)  
When setting ASPECT RATIO to LETTER, 16:9 screen detection ID  
signal will not be outputted from the Y/C OUT connector.  
SHUTTER  
The SHUTTER button on the right side section is used to select STEP for STEP  
fixed shutter speed orV.SCAN variable scanning rate for shooting computer VARIABLE  
monitor screens.  
STEP  
DETAIL  
Adjusts the detail enhancement level.  
MAX (7)  
• To sharpen details ....................... Increase the number. (UP)  
• To soften details ........................... Decrease the number. (DOWN)  
6
15  
gradations  
STEP .............. Enables setting of different fixed shutter speeds. [1/100,  
1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000] (U MODEL)  
[1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000,1/2000] (E MODEL)  
VARIABLE....... Selected when shooting computer monitor screens, etc.  
[Variable range: 60.1 to 2084.6 Hz] (U MODEL)  
to  
NORMAL (0)  
to  
-6  
MIN (-7)  
[Variable range: 50.1 to 2067.8 Hz] (E MODEL)  
DTL. V/H  
BAL  
Sets the direction, horizontal (H) or vertical (V), in which stronger detail H-MAX (4)  
FAW  
Selects the W.BAL switch ( on page 13) position to which the FAW (Full- NONE  
NONE  
enhancement is applied.  
3
9
@
Time Auto White Balance Adjustment) function is to be assigned.  
NONE ............. FAW function is not used.  
A ..................... FAW is assigned to the A position.  
B ..................... FAW is assigned to the B position.  
PRESET ......... FAW is assigned to the PRESET position.  
A
B
To strengthen the H enhancement ... ..Increase the number (UP).  
To strengthen the V enhancement ... ..Decrease the number (DOWN).  
gradations  
to  
PRESET  
NORMAL (0)  
to  
-3  
Note:  
While the LOLUX function is operating, the setting value is fixed at  
NORMAL and “FIX” is displayed.  
H-MIN (-4)  
DTL.  
Varies the detail enhancement level by changing the detail enhancement HIGH  
GAIN L  
GAIN M  
GAIN H  
Selects the gain value in each position of the GAIN switch (9 on page –3dB  
L: 0dB  
M: 9dB  
H: 18dB  
FREQUENCY  
frequency. Set in accordance with the subject  
HIGH ............. Applies strong detail enhancement.  
Used to shoot subjects with fine patterns.  
MIDDLE  
LOW  
13).  
0dB  
3dB  
6dB  
MIDDLE ........ Applies medium detail enhancement.  
9dB  
LOW .............. Applies weak detail enhancement.  
Used to shoot subjects with large patterns.  
Note:  
12dB  
18dB  
ALC  
While the LOLUX function is operating, the setting value is fixed at  
MIDDLE and “FIX” is displayed.  
SMOOTH  
TRANS  
Smoothens the transition when the GAIN switch  
(
on page 13), or ON  
OFF  
9
WHT.BAL switch ( on page 13) is switched over and achieves gradual OFF  
SKIN DTL  
DETECT  
Sets the Skin Detail function to ON or OFF.  
ON ................ Skin Detail function activated.  
OFF............... Skin Detail function not activated.  
ꢀ See "Using the Skin Detail Function" on page 91.  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
@
change in place of sudden change.  
However, the smooth transition function does not function when switching  
the GAIN switch set in ALC, FAS button and the LOLUX button.  
ON .................. Activates the smooth transition function.  
OFF................. Deactivates the smooth transition function.  
V.  
Increases the vertical resolution.  
NORMAL  
V.MAX  
NORMAL  
RESOLUTION • NORMAL .... Vertical resolution 380 lines.  
• V.MAX ......... Vertical resolution 450 lines  
SPOT L/  
BACK L  
Sets the level of auto iris when setting the AUTO IRIS switch to BACK L or LOW  
MIDDLE  
(The sensitivity is degraded and the bright sections may be colored  
depending on the subject.)  
SPOT L.  
LOW  
MIDDLE  
HIGH  
: Lowers the iris level.  
MIDDLE : Opens/Closes the iris by 1 step from the standard state.  
HIGH : Raises the iris level.  
KNEE  
POINT  
Sets the knee point (brightness level) when the AUTO KNEE function is  
set to OFF.  
80%  
85%  
100%  
90%  
95%  
PAGE BACK  
The CAMERA MENU returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed with  
the cursor at this position.  
–
–
100%  
ADVANCED  
PROCESS  
Displays the ADVANCED PROCESS Screen.  
ꢀ See "ADVANCED PROCESS Screen" on page 81.  
PAGE BACK  
The CAMERA MENU returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed with  
the cursor at this position.  
–
–
79  
80  
12. SETUP MENU  
12. SETUP MENU  
12-7 ADVANCED PROCESS Screen  
12-9 FILE MANAGE Screen  
The unit has three files that can be used for storing camera menus.The FILE MANAGE screen is for performing the operations for  
saving the set CAMERA MENU.  
Item  
COLOR  
Function, Operation  
Variation Range Initial Setting  
•
When menu settings are made using SCENE FILE A or B, the contents of the settings will be invalid if the storage operations  
are not performed on this screen. However, the SETUP MENU settings will be valid even if the storage operations are not  
performed.  
Sets the color matrix  
ON  
ON  
MATRIX  
OFF...... Deactivates the color matrix function  
ON ....... The color reproducibility is enhanced, but noise increases.  
OFF  
•
When menu settings are made using SCENE FILE OFF, the contents are stored in the unit at the time settings are changed  
on each menu screen even if the storage operations are not performed.  
CAUTION:  
During the LOLUX operation, COLOR MATRIX is fixed to the OFF  
setting and "FIX" is displayed.  
Storage Operation  
GAMMA  
Correction of the gamma curve to decide the reproducibility of black color. MAX (8)  
NORMAL  
1. Press the STATUS button for about 1 second to display the  
•
To enhance the black color reproducibility. However, halftones will be  
lost for white section  
7
CAMERA MENU screen.  
OPERATE/WARNING  
LIGHT  
MODE  
RM  
VTR  
RESET  
ON  
18  
OFF  
MONITOR  
INCOM  
MIC  
SELECT  
COUNTER  
CTL  
TC  
UB  
FILTER  
3200k  
5600k+1/8ND  
5600k+1/64ND  
CH-1  
CARBON  
DYNAMIC  
ALARM  
MIX  
CH-2  
1
2
3
............... Increase the number  
gradations  
2. Turn the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor with the FILE  
MANAGE item, and then press the SHUTTER dial in the  
direction of the arrow.  
INCOM  
MIC  
ON  
LEVEL  
SHUTTER STATUS  
MENU  
MONITOR  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
AUTO  
FRONT  
REAR  
MANUAL  
•
When reproducibility of the black color is not so important  
............... Decrease the number  
to  
AUDIO SELECT  
AUDIO INPUT  
OFF  
CH-1 AUDIO CH-2  
LEVEL  
CALL  
AUTO IRIS  
F
U
L
L
A
U
T
O
B
L
A
C
K
LOLUX  
BACK  
NORMAL  
SPOT  
L
STRETCH  
RM  
OFF  
DC IN  
/BATT.  
NORMAL (0)  
to  
-7  
NORMAL  
COMPRESS  
L
POWER  
•
The FILE MANAGE screen appears in the viewfinder.  
NG  
OPERATE  
ON  
OFF  
CAUTION:  
3. Choose the file to save in (A or B).  
•
During LOLUX operation or setting GAIN to 18 dB, "FIX" is displayed  
because GAMMA is fixed at the MIN value.  
MIN (-8)  
OFF  
1
2
Turn the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor with the  
STORE FILE item, and then press the SHUTTER dial  
in the direction of the arrow.  
Turn the SHUTTER dial to select the file to save in (A or  
B), and then press the SHUTTER dial in the direction of  
the arrow.  
2. 3. 4. 5.  
1. STATUS button  
SHUTTER dial  
SKIN COLOR  
ADJUST  
Pressing the SHUTTER dial once when the cursor is at this position  
switches the screen to display the SKIN COLOR ADJUST screen.  
SHUTTER  
MENU  
4. Save the menu settings.  
PAGE BACK  
The PROCESS MENU returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed with  
the cursor at this position.  
–
–
Turn the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor with the STORE  
item, and then press the SHUTTER dial in the direction of  
the arrow.  
•
The“STORE OK?”message appears in the lower section  
of the centre of the screen.  
When the SHUTTER dial is pressed in the direction of  
the arrow once more, the menu settings are stored in  
the selected STORE FILE.  
12-8 SKIN COLOR ADJUST Screen  
- - - CAMERA MENU  
-
- -  
SCENE F I LE  
VF D I SPLAY MENU .  
OPERAT I ON MENU .  
PROCESS MENU .  
F I LE MANAGE .  
SETUP MENU .  
: A  
5. Close the FILE MANAGE screen  
Turn the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor with PAGE BACK,  
and then press the SHUTTER dial in the direction of the  
arrow.  
Item  
Function, Operation  
Variation Range Initial Setting  
.
.
.
SKIN COLOR  
DETECT  
Sets whether it is possible to change the color used by the Skin Tone STOP  
STOP  
.
Cursor  
.
Detail function.  
EXECUTE  
T I ME DATE MENU .  
EX I T  
.
•
The CAMERA MENU screen returns in the viewfinder.  
Memo:  
When changing the menu settings in SCENE FILE A  
EXECUTE ...... Choose this setting to allow detection of the color used by  
the Skin Tone Detail function.  
STOP ............. Choose this setting to stop detection of the color used by  
the Skin Tone Detail function.  
ꢀ See "Using the Skin Tone Detail Function" on page 91.  
•
and saving in STORE FILE B:  
SCENE FILE B: The contents become the menu  
contents of the changed settings.  
SCENE FILE A: The contents become the menu  
contents valid before the settings were changed.  
When changing the menu settings in SCENE FILE OFF  
and saving in STORE FILE B:  
SCENE FILE B: The contents become the menu  
contents of the changed settings.  
CAMERA MENU screen  
- - - F I LE MANAGE - - -  
SKIN COLOR  
RANGE  
The setting of this item can only be changed when the SKIN COLOR WIDE  
DETECT item is set to EXECUTE.  
This setting is for adjusting the skin color range where Skin Tone Detail (33 gradations)  
functions.(When this item is selected, the area where the SkinTone Detail  
function is applicable is indicated by zebra patterns on the screen.)  
While viewing the zebra pattern range, perform the adjustment.  
Increasing the range ........ Increase the number  
NORMAL  
+19  
SCENE F I LE  
STORE F I LE  
A
: A  
•
STORE  
Cursor  
to  
RESET F I LE  
: OFF  
NORMAL  
to  
-11  
RESET  
PAGE BACK  
STORE OK?  
SCENE FILE OFF: The contents become the menu  
contents of the changed settings.  
Increasing the range . ...... Decrease the number  
NARROW  
PAGE BACK  
The ADVANCED PROCESS MENU returns when the SHUTTER dial is  
pressed with the cursor at this position.  
–
–
Ⅲ
Resetting the menu settings to the initial settings is also  
done using the FILE MANAGE screen.  
FILE MANAGE screen  
ꢀ See "Resetting the Camera Menu Settings" on page 85.  
81  
82  
12. SETUP MENU  
12. SETUP MENU  
12-10 SETUP Screen  
12-11 TIME DATE screen  
Item  
Function, Operation  
Variation Range Initial Setting  
Item  
Function, Operation  
Variation Range Initial Setting  
26 PIN OUT  
Other than composite signals, another type of video signals can be Y/C  
outputted from the VTR/RM multi-pin connector. The other output video RGB  
CPN  
DISPLAY  
For setting whether to display the time and date on the viewfinder.  
OFF : Time and date are not displayed.  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
signal is selected here.  
CPN  
ON : Time and date are displayed.  
Y/C : Outputs Y/C separate signals.  
RGB : Outputs RGB signals.  
When setting to ON, the time and date are recorded on the upper of left of  
the video.  
CPN : Outputs component video signals.  
DISPLAY  
MODE  
For selecting the mode for displaying the time and date on the viewfinder. BARS+CAM  
BARS+CAM : Time and date are displayed when outputting color bar signals BAR  
BARS+CAM  
CHARACTER  
MIX  
For selecting whether to mix characters in the MONITOR OUT video.  
OFF : No characters are displayed  
ON : Character-mixed display  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
or camera images.  
CAM  
BAR  
CAM  
: Time and date are displayed when outputting color bar  
signals.  
: Time and date are displayed when outputting camera signals.  
SET UP  
(U MODEL)  
For selecting whether to include setup signals in the camera images, OFF  
external input video or VCR playback video signals.  
OFF : Setup signals are not included.  
ON  
“- - -” is displayed when DISPLAY is set to OFF, and the setting will be  
unavailable.  
ON : Setup signals are included. (Setup level: 7.5%)  
DISP STYLE  
DATE STYLE  
TIME STYLE  
For selecting the format of the time and date display.  
DATE&TIME : The time and date are displayed.  
DATE&TIME  
DATE  
TIME  
DATE&TIME  
H PHASE  
For adjusting the horizontal phase of the unit in relation to the signal  
(external sync signal) input through the GENLOCK/AUX IN connector on  
the left side of the unit.  
Delaying the horizontal phase of the unit in relation to the external sync  
signal .  
................... Increase the number  
Speeding up the horizontal phase of the unit in relation to the external  
sync signal .  
0
to  
255  
128  
DATE  
TIME  
: The date is displayed.  
: The time is displayed.  
“- - -” is displayed when DISPLAY is set to OFF, and the setting will be  
unavailable.  
For selecting the format of the date display.  
YY/MM/DD  
MM/DD/YY  
DD/MM/YY  
MM/DD/YY (U)  
DD/MM/YY (E)  
YY/MM/DD : Displays in the format of year/month/date.  
MM/DD/YY : Displays in the format of month/date/year.  
DD/MM/YY : Displays in the format of date/month/year.  
“- - -” is displayed when DISPLAY is set to OFF, and the setting will be  
unavailable.  
................... Decrease the number  
∗ Adjustment is not possible if the external sync signal is not input.Possible  
values are indicated by - - -.  
SC COARSE  
For roughly adjusting the unit’s sub-carrier (SC) phase against signals  
(external synchronous signals) inputted to the GENLOCK/AUX IN terminal  
on the left side of the unit.  
(0°, 90°, 180°, 270°)  
∗ Adjustment is not possible if the external sync signal is not input.Possible  
values are indicated by - - -.  
0
90  
180  
270  
0
For selecting the format of the time display.  
24 HOUR  
12 HOUR  
24 HOUR  
24 HOUR : Displays the time using the 24 hour system.  
12 HOUR : Displays the time using the 12 hour system.  
“- - -” is displayed when DISPLAY is set to OFF, and the setting will be  
unavailable.  
SEC DISPLAY For selecting whether to display the seconds in the time display.  
OFF : Seconds are not displayed.  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
SC FINE  
For fine adjusting the sub-carrier (SC) of the unit in relation to the signal  
(external sync signal) input through the GENLOCK/AUX IN connector on  
the left side of the unit.  
Rotating the sub-carrier clockwise in relation to the external sync signal  
................... Increase the number  
0
to  
255  
128  
ON : Seconds are displayed.  
“- - -” is displayed when DISPLAY is set to OFF, and the setting will be  
unavailable.  
Rotating the sub-carrier anticlockwise in relation to the external sync signal  
................... Decrease the number  
∗ Adjustment is not possible if the external sync signal is not input.Possible  
values are indicated by - - -.  
PAGE BACK  
When the cursor is at this position, pressing the SHUTTER dial once will  
return the unit to the CAMERA MENU screen.  
–
–
PAGE BACK  
The CAMERA MENU returns when the SHUTTER dial is pressed with  
the cursor at this position.  
–
–
83  
84  
13. FEATURES OF THE CAMERA SECTION  
12. SETUP MENU  
12-12 Resetting of Camera Menu Setting Values  
13-1 Full-Time Auto White Balance (FAW)  
Using the FILE MANAGE screen, the CAMERA MENU settings can be reset to the initial setting values. On the FILE MANAGE  
screen, select the file of the CAMERA MENU to be reset, and then perform the resetting operation.  
The FAW function adjusts the white balance  
- - - OPERAT I ON - - -  
value automatically as the lighting condition  
SCENE F I LE  
ASPECT RAT I O  
A
: 4 : 3  
changes.  
SHUTTER  
FAW  
: STEP  
: NONE  
: 0 dB  
This mode is convenient when you have no time to adjust the  
white balance or when the camera is moved frequently in and  
out of places under different lighting conditions.  
GA I N  
GA I N  
GA I N  
L
M
H
: 9d B  
: 18dB  
: OFF  
Reset Operation  
SMOOTH TRANS  
SPOT L / BACK  
PAGE BACK  
L
: M ID  
1. Press the STATUS button for about 1 second to display the  
OPERATE/WARNING  
CAMERA MENU screen.  
Setting procedure  
The FAW function can be activated with item "FAW" on the  
OPERATION Menu.  
This item allows allocation of the FAW function to the A, B or  
PRST position of the WHT.BAL selector switch.  
ꢀ See "OPERATION Screen" on page 79.  
LIGHT  
ON  
OFF  
MODE  
RM  
VTR  
RESET  
MONITOR  
INCOM  
MIC  
SELECT  
COUNTER  
CTL  
TC  
UB  
FILTER  
3200k  
CH-1  
CARBON  
DYNAMIC  
ALARM  
MIX  
1
2
3
CH-2  
5600k+1/8ND  
5600k+1/64ND  
INCOM  
MIC  
ON  
2. Turn the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor with the FILE  
MANAGE item, and then press the SHUTTER dial in the  
direction of the arrow.  
LEVEL  
SHUTTER STATUS  
MENU  
MONITOR  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
AUTO  
FRONT  
REAR  
MANUAL  
AUDIO SELECT  
AUDIO INPUT  
OFF  
CH-1 AUDIO CH-2  
LEVEL  
CALL  
AUTO IRIS  
F
U
L
L
A
U
T
O
B
L
A
C
K
LOLUX  
BACK  
NORMAL  
SPOT  
L
STRETCH  
RM  
OFF  
DC IN  
/BATT.  
NORMAL  
COMPRESS  
L
POWER  
•
The FILE MANAGE screen appears in the viewfinder.  
NG  
OPERATE  
ON  
OFF  
OPERATE/WARNING  
LIGHT  
ON  
OFF  
MODE  
RM  
VTR  
RESET  
MONITOR  
INCOM  
MIC  
3. Choose the file of the CAMERA MENU to be reset (A, B,  
SELECT  
COUNTER  
CTL  
TC  
UB  
FILTER  
3200k  
5600k+1/8ND  
5600k+1/64ND  
CH-1  
MIX  
CH-2  
CARBON  
DYNAMIC  
ALARM  
1
2
3
INCOM  
CAUTION:  
MIC  
ON  
LEVEL  
SHUTTER STATUS  
MENU  
MONITOR  
OFF or ALL)  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
AUTO  
FRONT  
REAR  
MANUAL  
5.  
AUDIO SELECT  
AUDIO INPUT  
OFF  
1. STATUS button  
The FAW (Full-time Auto White balance) function cannot  
provide optimum white balance with a subject outside the  
FAW adjustment range, for example when it contains only  
a single color or not enough white color.  
CH-1 AUDIO CH-2  
LEVEL  
•
If ALL is selected, all the CAMERA MENU files will be  
reset.  
Turn the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor with the  
RESET FILE item, and then press the SHUTTER dial in  
the direction of the arrow.  
Turn the SHUTTER dial to select the file to be reset,  
and then press the SHUTTER dial in the direction of the  
arrow.  
CALL  
AUTO IRIS  
F
U
L
L
A
U
T
O
B
L
A
C
K
LOLUX  
BACK  
NORMAL  
SPOT  
L
STRETCH  
TER dial  
RM  
OFF  
DC IN  
/BATT.  
NORMAL  
COMPRESS  
L
POWER  
1
OPERATE  
NG  
ON  
OFF  
SHUTTER  
MENU  
2
4. Reset the camera menu settings.  
1
Turn the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor with the  
RESET item, and then press the SHUTTER dial in the  
direction of the arrow.  
AUTO IRIS  
FULL AUTO BLACK  
LOLUX  
BACK  
NORMAL  
SPOT  
L
STRETCH  
NORMAL  
COMPRESS  
L
•
The “RESET OK?” message message appears in the  
lower section of the centre of the screen.  
- - - CAMERA MENU  
-
- -  
SCENE F I LE  
VF D I SPLAY MENU .  
OPERAT I ON MENU .  
PROCESS MENU .  
F I LE MANAGE .  
SETUP MENU .  
: A  
2
When the SHUTTER dial is pressed in the direction of  
the arrow once more, the CAMERA MENU settings of  
the selected file are reset to the initial settings.  
.
.
OPERATE  
NG  
.
ON  
OFF  
.
Cursor  
.
5. Close the FILE MANAGE screen  
Turn the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor with PAGE BACK,  
and then press the SHUTTER dial in the direction of the  
arrow.  
T I ME DATE MENU .  
EX I T  
.
•
The CAMERA MENU screen returns in the viewfinder.  
CAMERA MENU screen  
- - - F I LE MANAGE - - -  
WHT.BAL selector switch  
SCENE F I LE  
STORE F I LE  
A
: A  
STORE  
RESET F I LE  
: OFF  
RESET  
PAGE BACK  
Cursor  
RESET OK?  
FILE MANAGE screen  
85  
86  
13. FEATURES OF THE CAMERA SECTION  
13. FEATURES OF THE CAMERA SECTION  
13-3 Shooting the Screen Image on a Computer Monitor  
13-2 IRIS (Brightness) Adjustment  
ADJUSTMENT OF LENS IRIS  
Ⅲ Outline  
The lens iris can be adjusted using any of the  
following three methods.  
The following operation allows the alignment of the shutter  
speed of the camera with the variable scanning rate of a  
computer monitor or display.  
• Automatic adjustment  
Band  
Set the iris mode switch to "A" (Auto).  
The iris is adjusted automatically according to the brightness  
of the object.  
When a computer monitor screen or display is shot with the  
camera, a bright horizontal line indicating excessive exposure  
is displayed in cases when the scanning rate of the monitor  
is faster than the shutter speed of the camera. A dark  
horizontal line indicating insufficient exposure is displayed in  
cases when the monitor's scanning rate is slower than the  
camera's shutter speed.  
The scanning frequency of a monitor varies due to various  
reasons during the computer operation. Adjust the scanning  
rate to obtain a stable image while observing the image in  
the viewfinder.  
Iris ring  
• Manual adjustment  
Set the iris mode switch to "M" (Manual).  
The iris can be adjusted manually by rotating the iris ring.  
Video monitor  
• Temporary auto iris adjustment  
During manual iris adjustment, the auto iris adjustment mode  
is activated only while this button is held depressed.  
RET  
M
A
OPERATE/WARNING  
W
T
LIGHT  
ON  
OFF  
MODE  
RM  
VTR  
RESET  
Ⅲ Changing the auto iris adjustment setup  
MONITOR  
INCOM  
MIC  
SELECT  
COUNTER  
CTL  
TC  
UB  
FILTER  
3200k  
CH-1  
CARBON  
DYNAMIC  
ALARM  
MIX  
1
2
3
CH-2  
5600k+1/8ND  
5600k+1/64ND  
INCOM  
Under special lighting conditions such as backlight, it is often  
appropriate to change the value set by the auto iris  
adjustment.  
MIC  
ON  
LEVEL  
SHUTTER STATUS  
MENU  
MONITOR  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
AUTO  
FRONT  
REAR  
MANUAL  
Ⅲ Variable Scan [V.SCAN]  
AUDIO SELECT  
AUDIO INPUT  
OFF  
CH-1 AUDIO CH-2  
LEVEL  
CALL  
AUTO IRIS  
F
U
L
L
A
U
T
O
B
L
A
C
K
LOLUX  
BACK  
NORMAL  
SPOT  
L
STRETCH  
RM  
OFF  
DC IN  
/BATT.  
NORMAL  
COMPRESS  
L
Temporary auto iris  
button  
•
Basic operation  
POWER  
This can be done by the following methods.  
• Setting the AUTO IRIS LEVEL switch of the camera  
ꢀ See "SWITCH FUNCTIONS" on page 90.  
Set the SHUTTER item on the OPERATION MENU screen  
to VARIABLE. Then move the SHUTTER knob upwards or  
downwards to change the shutter speed.  
NG  
OPERATE  
ON  
OFF  
Iris mode switch  
SHUTTER dial  
(The speed is displayed on the viewfinder screen.)  
•
Compatible frequencies  
The variable scan function is compatible with scanning  
frequencies in the following range.  
60.1 Hz to 2084.6 Hz (U MODEL)  
- - - OPERAT I ON - - -  
SCENE F I LE  
ASPECT RAT I O  
A
50.1 Hz to 2067.8 Hz (E MODEL)  
: 4 : 3  
SHUTTER  
FAW  
: VAR I ABLE  
: NONE  
: 0 dB  
CAUTION:  
ZEBRA PATTERN DISPLAY DURING MANUAL ADJUSTMENT  
GA I N  
GA I N  
GA I N  
L
M
H
: 9d B  
: 18dB  
This function is not compatible with slow-speed computer  
monitors with a vertical scanning speed of 50 Hz.  
SMOOTH TRANS  
SPOT L / BACK  
PAGE BACK  
: OFF  
: M IDDLE  
By setting the ZEBRA switch to ON, oblique stripes (zebra  
L
pattern) can be displayed in the sections with a luminance level  
of 70% to 80% or sections with levels over 100% in the  
viewfinder.  
OPERATION MENU screen  
The zebra pattern can be used as a reference for manual iris  
adjustment.  
ZEBRA  
SKIN  
AREA  
OFF  
P
AUTO  
WHITE  
ON  
When adjusting the iris manually, adjust it so that the zebra  
patterns are displayed in the section that you want to stress in  
the subject.  
ACCU  
FOCUS  
VTR  
AUDIO  
TAKE  
LEVEL CH-1  
•
When CHARACTER of the Camera SETUP Menu screen is  
set to ON, the zebra pattern will also appear in the MONITOR  
OUT connector video.  
•
•
The zebra pattern will also appear during color bar output  
when the ZEBRA switch is set to ON.  
ZEBRA switch  
The initial setting is 70 to 80%. However, using the "ZEBRA"  
setting on the VF DISPLAY MENU, zebra patterns can be  
displayed in the sections with a luminance level of 85% to  
95%, over 95% and over 100%.  
ꢀ See "VF DISPLAY MENU Screen" on page 78.  
87  
88  
13. FEATURES OF THE CAMERA SECTION  
13. FEATURES OF THE CAMERA SECTION  
13-4 Gain (Sensitivity) Adjustment  
13-5 Switch Setup According to Illumination and Subject  
The gain should be switched when the brightness is insufficient due to poor lighting conditions.  
Various switch settings are performed to accommodate the conditions of the illumination and the subject when shooting.  
GAIN SWITCHING  
SWITCH FUNCTIONS  
1AUTO IRIS LEVEL switch  
This switch allows the gain to be boosted when the illumination  
This switch allows the reference value for the auto iris  
adjustment to be changed according to the lighting condition.  
BACK. L : When the subject is in backlit conditions.  
Opens the iris wider than the standard setting.  
NORMAL: Normal lighting condition.  
of the subject is insufficient.  
GAIN switch  
Switch Position  
Factory-Set Gain  
AUTO IRIS LEVEL  
switch  
BLACK stretch/black  
compress setting switch  
AUTO IRIS  
FULL AUTO BLACK  
LOLUX  
L
M
H
0dB  
9dB  
BACK  
NORMAL  
SPOT  
L
STRETCH  
NORMAL  
COMPRESS  
L
AUTO IRIS  
FULL AUTO BLACK  
LOLUX  
SPOT. L : When the subject is under a spotlight.  
Closes the iris narrower than the standard setting.  
BACK  
NORMAL  
SPOT  
L
STRETCH  
18dB  
NORMAL  
COMPRESS  
L
Ⅲ The level of auto iris can be set in SPOT L/BACK L of the  
Camera OPERATION menu screen when setting the AUTO  
IRIS switch to BACK L or SPOT L. ꢀ See page 79.  
When the GAIN switch is switched, the newly set gain is  
displayed for about 2 seconds on the Status 0 or Status 1 screen  
in the viewfinder.  
OPERATE  
NG  
ON  
OFF  
Set it to L (0 dB) in normal use.  
2BLACK stretch/black compress switch  
OPERATE  
NG  
ON  
OFF  
Ⅲ The gain set for each of the switch positions can be changed  
with "GAIN" on the OPERATION MENU screen.  
This switch makes the image easier to see by varying the  
black gain.  
BLACK STRETCH : Boosts the gain of black areas to  
improve the reproducibility of black.  
Ⅲ It is also possible to use the ALC function that varies the gain  
automatically.  
ꢀ See page 79 for details.  
NORMAL  
: Normal black gain.  
BLACK COMPRESS : Attenuates the gain of black areas to  
CAUTION:  
Ⅲ To make the gain transition smoother, set “SMOOTHTRANS”  
on the OPERATION MENU to “ON”.  
make the image sharper.  
When gain is set to "ALC", gain is boosted automatically  
as the illumination becomes darker. However, noise will  
increase a little because the screen becomes brighter as  
the ALC (Auto Level Control) function boosts the gain more  
than in the case of manual adjustment.  
ꢀ See page 79.  
However, note that the SMOOTH TRANS function is not  
available if gain is set to ALC.  
FULL AUTO SHOOTING (FAS) FUNCTION  
The FAS function provides a wide range of compatibility with  
shooting conditions that varies as you move between indoors  
and outdoors or between bright and dark locations.It eliminates  
the need to change the switch and filter positions every time  
you move.  
The FAS function provides an integrated control of the ALC  
(Automatic Level Control), Auto iris and FAW (Full-time Auto  
White balance) functions.  
FULL AUTO  
indicator  
FULL AUTO\  
shooting button  
GAIN BOOST UNDER LOLUX CONDITION  
The LOLUX button is used when the illumination is still  
insufficient after compensating with the GAIN switch.  
Press the button to enter the LOLUX mode in which the gain is  
boosted by about 33 dB.  
AUTO IRIS  
FULL AUTO BLACK  
STRETCH  
LOLUX  
BACK  
NORMAL  
SPOT  
L
LOLUX on/off button  
NORMAL  
COMPRESS  
L
AUTO IRIS  
FULL AUTO BLACK  
LOLUX  
BACK  
NORMAL  
SPOT  
L
STRETCH  
"LOLUX ON" is displayed for about 2 seconds on the Status 0  
or Status 1 mode screen in the viewfinder.  
NORMAL  
COMPRESS  
Operation  
L
Pressing the button again cancels the LOLUX mode.  
"LOLUX OFF" is displayed for a few seconds.  
OPERATE  
NG  
1. Simply press the FULL AUTO button to enter the FAS mode,  
in which the FULL AUTO indicator lights and "FAS" is  
displayed to the right in the viewfinder.  
ON  
OFF  
Ⅲ When the LOLUX function is in use, the image definition on  
the screen will degrade to increase residual images, but this  
is not a malfunction.  
OPERATE  
NG  
ON  
OFF  
2. Pressing the FULL AUTO button again cancels the FAS  
mode and turns the FULL AUTO indicator off.  
Ⅲ Automatic Setting Contents  
•
•
•
•
If you have been displaying the color bars, the screen is  
switched automatically to the camera image.  
The auto iris adjustment mode is entered even if the iris mode  
switch of the lens is set to manual.  
[Relationship between gain, iris and shutter]  
CAUTION:  
The GAIN switch and WHT.BAL switch settings are defeated  
in the FAS mode.  
•
•
The FAS function will not operate during external video  
signal input.  
When the power is turned on while the camera is in the  
FAS mode, it takes about 10 seconds before the  
automatic adjustment of FAS is completed.  
• In the FAS mode, the audio recording level is not set  
automatically to the AUTO mode.  
To select the AUTO mode, set the AUTO/MANUAL switch  
of the VCR section to AUTO.  
0.7 Ix  
8 Ix  
32 Ix  
FULL AUTO SHOOTING  
2000 Ix  
4200 Ix  
18000 Ix  
The LOLUX button setting is active even in the FAS mode.  
However, the ALC and EEI are defeated in the LOLUX mode,  
in which only the auto iris adjustment and FAW are used.  
1/50  
1/60  
1/200  
1/240  
(E MODEL)  
(U MODEL)  
33 dB  
12dB  
0 dB  
LOLUX  
ALC  
AUTOMATIC IRIS  
EEI  
•
•
All of the previous setting contents are recalled when the  
FAS mode is cancelled.  
F1.4  
F11  
F16  
The SMOOTH TRANS function is defeated during switch to  
the FAS function.  
89  
90  
13. FEATURES OF THE CAMERA SECTION  
13. FEATURES OF THE CAMERA SECTION  
13-6 How to Use Skin Tone Detail  
13-6 How to Use Skin Tone Detail (Cont’d)  
The contour emphasis in the skin color areas of the video signal can be controlled and made to appear gentle and smooth.  
Ⅲ Confirming the color tone area adjusted with  
the Skin Tone Detail function  
Ⅲ
Setting the Color and Range of the Skin Tone  
Detail Function  
OPERATE/WARNING  
LIGHT  
ON  
OFF  
MODE  
RM  
VTR  
RESET  
MONITOR  
INCOM  
MIC  
SELECT  
COUNTER  
CTL  
TC  
UB  
FILTER  
3200k  
5600k+1/8ND  
5600k+1/64ND  
CH-1  
MIX  
CH-2  
CARBON  
DYNAMIC  
When the ZEBRA switch on the front section is pressed to the  
“SKIN AREA”side, the color tone areas adjusted with SkinTone  
Detail are displayed in the viewfinder.  
ALARM  
1
2
3
INCOM  
MIC  
ON  
LEVEL  
SHUTTER STATUS  
MENU  
MONITOR  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
AUTO  
FRONT  
REAR  
MANUAL  
AUDIO SELECT  
AUDIO INPUT  
OFF  
1. Press the STATUS button for about 1 second to display the  
CH-1 AUDIO CH-2  
LEVEL  
CALL  
A
U
T
O
I
R
I
S
F
U
L
L
A
U
T
O
B
L
A
C
K
LOLUX  
BACK  
NORMAL  
SPOT  
L
STRETCH  
RM  
OFF  
DC IN  
/BATT.  
NORMAL  
COMPRESS  
L
CAMERA MENU screen.  
ZEBRA  
SKIN  
AREA  
OFF  
POWER  
AUTO  
WHITE  
NG  
OPERATE  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
ACCU  
2. Turn the SHUTTER dial downward to align the cursor (>)  
with the PROCESS item.Then press the SHUTTER dial in  
the direction of the arrow to display the PROCESS screen.  
FOCUS  
VTR  
AUDIO  
TAKE  
LEVEL CH-1  
2. ~ 8.  
SHUTTER dial 1.STATUS button  
3. Turn the SHUTTER dial downward to align the cursor (>)  
with the ADVANCED PROCESS item. Then press the  
SHUTTER dial in the direction of the arrow to display the  
ADVANCED PROCESS screen.  
SHUTTER  
ZEBRA switch  
MENU  
4. Turn the SHUTTER dial downward to align the cursor (>)  
with the SKIN COLOR ADJUST item. Then press the  
SHUTTER dial in the direction of the arrow to display the  
SKIN COLOR ADJUST screen.  
-
-
-
CAMERA MENU  
-
-
-
SCENE F I LE  
VF D I SPLAY MENU .  
OPERAT I ON MENU .  
PROCESS MENU .  
F I LE STORE .  
SETUP MENU .  
: A  
.
.
Cursor  
.
•
The frame shown on the screen indicates the detection  
area of the skin tone detail function.  
.
.
T I ME DATE MENU .  
EX I T  
.
ACCU - FOCUS  
5. When the cursor (>) is aligned with the SKIN COLOR DET.  
item, the SHUTTER dial is pressed in the direction of the  
arrow and EXECUTE selected, the skin color detection  
mode is activated.  
Ⅲ Using the Skin Tone Detail Function  
G
F
-
-
-
PROCESS  
-
-
-
To use the skin tone detail function set on the SKIN COLOR  
ADJUST screen, set the SKIN DTL DETECT item on the  
PROCESS menu to “ON”.  
SCENE F I LE  
MASTER BLACK  
DETA I L  
DTL . V / H BAL  
DTL . FREQUENCY  
A
: NORMAL  
: NORMAL  
: NORMAL  
: LOW  
: OFF  
: NORMAL  
6. Shoot so that the area with the color that you want to detect  
is brought within the detection area frame.To decide on the  
color for the detection, press the SHUTTER dial to set SKIN  
COLOR DET. to STOP.  
I
D T L D E T E C T  
SK I N  
SD  
B
"SD"  
V
RESOLUT I ON  
ADVANCED PROCESS .  
PAGE BACK  
.
While the SkinTone Detail function operates, the “SD” indicator  
is displayed on the Status 0 and Status 1 screen in the  
viewfinder.  
display  
•
The areas recognized by the skin tone detail function  
appear with superimposed zebra patterns.  
If the color is not recognized as a color that the skin tone  
detail function works with, "ERROR" is displayed on the  
screen.  
PROCESS screen  
•
-
-
-
ADVANCED PROCESS  
-
-
-
STATUS 0  
SCENE F I LE  
COLOR MATR I X  
GAMMA  
A
: ON  
: NORMA L  
.
SK I N COLOR ADJUST .  
PAGE BACK  
7. If you want to change the color range recognized by the  
skin tone detail function, perform the following operations.  
Set the SKIN COLOR DET. item to EXECUTE.  
1
Turn the SHUTTER dial to align the cursor (>) with SKIN  
COLOR RANGE, and then press the SHUTTER dial in the  
direction of the arrow.  
ADVANCED PROCESS screen  
-
-
SK I N COLOR ADJUST  
-
-
a
The area with the setting value starts blinking, and  
the value can now be changed.  
Detection  
area  
2
3
Turn the SHUTTER dial up or down to widen or narrow the  
color range.  
• Adjust the range while observing the zebra patterns.  
To decide the color range, press the SHUTTER dial in  
the direction of the arrow.  
ERORR  
SK I N COLOR DET .  
SK I N COLOR RANGE  
PAGE BACK  
: EXECUTE  
: NORMA L  
SKIN COLOR ADJUST screen  
a
The setting value stops blinking but remains lit.  
8. To stop the SKIN COLOR ADJUST operation, align the  
cursor (>) with BACK PAGE and press the SHUTTER dial  
in the direction of the arrow.  
SKIN COLOR ADJUST screen  
91  
92  
13. FEATURES OF THE CAMERA SECTION  
13. FEATURES OF THE CAMERA SECTION  
13-7 Connecting the Local Remote Control Unit (RM-LP55/RM-LP57)  
13-8 Connecting the camera remote control unit  
PUSH  
BACK TALLY lamp  
RM-LP55  
1.  
MODE  
switch  
Headset  
DV CAMCORDER  
VTR/RM  
GY-DV550  
AT
LIGHT  
ON  
OFF  
MODE  
RM  
VTR  
VTR/RM connector  
INCOM  
MIC  
COUNTER  
CTL  
TC  
UB  
CARBON  
DYNAMIC  
INCOM  
MIC  
ON  
LEVEL  
-
H
CH-1  
CH-2  
PROMPTER  
OUTPUT  
Camera remote control unit  
FRONT  
REAR  
L
AUDIO INPUT  
OFF  
GENLOCK/AUX IN  
O
EL  
CLH-I1NE OUT  
CALL  
Y/C OUT MONITOR OUT  
VIDEO OUT  
CH-2  
RM  
OFF  
DC IN  
/BATT.  
REMOTE  
AUDIO IN  
FRONT  
TC IN  
TC OUT  
LENS  
POWER  
D
V
L
I
N
E
MIC  
+48V  
ON  
LINE  
MIC  
+48V  
ON  
INTERCOM  
FRONT  
DC INPUT  
EARPHONE  
AUDIO IN  
RA
DC  
OUTPUT  
REMOTE  
3.  
INCOM MIC  
switch  
INTERCOM  
connector  
4.  
INCOM MIC  
switch  
Headset  
It is possible to set the switch functions of the camera section  
using the local remote control unit (RM-LP55/RM-LP57)  
2.  
POWER switch  
Memo:  
•
•
If the switch functions for this unit and the local remote  
control unit are the same, the switch function of the local  
remote control unit will have priority.  
The IRIS AUTO/MANUAL setting will be the local remote  
control unit switch setting regardless of the lens section  
switch setting.  
H. PHASE, SC COARSE and SC FINE cannot be  
adjusted using the local remote control unit.  
When RM-LP55 is connected, the shutter speed  
displayed on RM-LP55 may slightly differ from the speed  
displayed on this unit.  
Connection  
The unit can be remotely controlled using the camera remote  
control unit. Use the following available products.  
4. Use the INCOM MIC switch to set whether to use the  
microphone of the intercom headset.  
Connect the local remote control unit cable to the REMOTE  
connector of this unit.  
•
The microphone of the headset will become available for  
use when setting to ON and the volume can be adjusted  
by turning the volume knob.  
Ⅲ Camera remote control unit  
•
•
...............  
• RM-P200  
Maximum cable length is 100m.  
(Not available for 4-inch viewfinders.)  
Settings  
CAUTION:  
5. Composite video signals of the camera are constantly  
outputted from theVTR/RM multi-pin connector.Other than  
this signal, another type of video signals can be outputted.  
The output signal is selected in 26 PIN OUT of the Camera  
SETUP menu screen.  
To use the camera remote control unit RM-P200, internal  
adjustments of the RM-P200 are required. It is, therefore,  
mandatory that you contact the nearest JVC-authorized  
service agent for inquiry about the adjustments.  
● Set VTR Setup menu No. 050 REMOTE SELECT of this unit  
to LOCAL.  
● When also using the DV terminal, set VTR Setup menu No.  
050 REMOTE SELECT to IEEE1394.  
(Y/C, RGB or component video signal)  
...............  
• RM-P300  
Cable length is 200m only.  
CAUTION:  
Ⅲ Intercom headset  
• KA-310  
Memo:  
When settingVTR Setup menu No.050 REMOTE SELECT  
to IEEE1394 + RS232C, the local remote control unit will  
be inoperable.  
•
External input video signals will not be outputted from  
the VTR/RM multi-pin connector even when setting the  
VTR INPUT switch to AUX.  
Connection  
•
•
Playback video of the VCR will not be outputted from the  
VTR/RM multi-pin connector.  
● Connect the camera remote control unit to the VTR/RM  
multi-pin connector.  
● When using the intercom headset, connect the headset  
to the INTERCOM connector.  
● To check the prompter output of the camera remote control  
unit, connect a monitor to the PROMPTER OUTPUT  
connector.  
Operation  
Call signals will be sent to the operator of the camera  
remote control unit while the CALL button is held down.  
During this time, the BACK TALLY lamp will blink. The  
BACK TALLY lamp will blink when the call signal is  
received.  
The screen will distort when inputting sync signals to  
both the main unit and camera remote control unit.  
When the power is set to ON during input of external  
synchronous signals, the screen may shift vertically for  
a few seconds; however, this is not a malfunction of the  
unit.  
When the OPERATE switch of the local remote control unit is  
set to ON, the local remote control unit will be operable.  
I Unavailable functions  
•
•
The following functions are unavailable from the local remote  
control unit.  
• RM-LP55 : GAIN ALC setting  
SHUTTER EEI setting  
ZOOM  
Settings  
1. Set the MODE switch to RM.  
FOCUS  
SC COARSE  
SC FINE  
H PHASE  
GAMMA  
•
Read the instruction manual of the camera remote control  
unit for the correct usage.  
2.Select the power source of this unit using the POWER switch.  
When supplying power from the power supply of the camera  
remote control unit through theVTR/RM multi-pin connector,  
set the POWER switch to RM.  
TITLE  
TITLE SET  
• RM-LP57 : SHUTTER EEI setting  
GAIN ALC setting  
SC COARSE  
SC FINE  
3.Set the INCOM MIC setting switch according to the intercom  
headset microphone type (carbon-type or dynamic-type  
microphone).  
H PHASE  
93  
94  
14. OTHERS  
13. FEATURES OF THE CAMERA SECTION  
13-8 Connecting the camera remote control unit (Cont’d)  
14-1 Troubleshooting  
Warnings concerning problems with the unit are provide in the form of indicators, display indications and monitor tones.  
The warnings are of the following two types.  
• Alarm indications : These indications are given to provide warning on the status of the unit, for example when the tape or battery pack should be replaced.  
• Error code display: In case an error occurs during operation, the unit self-diagnoses the cause and shows the diagnostics results  
on the counter display.When this happens, the unit stops operation automatically or ejects the videocassette.  
I TALLY lamp display when the camera remote control unit  
is connected.  
Operation  
Set the POWER switch of the camera remote control unit to  
ON. About 30 seconds after turning the power on, the camera  
remote control unit will be operative.  
CAUTION:  
Alarms and error codes of the external VCR connected to the VTR/RM multi-pin connector will not be displayed.  
BACK TALLY  
Memo:  
lamp  
SERVO  
indicator  
LIGHT  
ON  
OFF  
MODE  
RM  
VTR  
After the POWER switch is turned on, the camera remote  
control unit takes about 30 seconds to prepare for correct  
communication with this unit.  
ALARM INDICATIONS  
WARNING indicator  
RF indicator  
Li indicator  
INCOM  
MIC  
COUNTER  
CTL  
TC  
UB  
CARBON  
DYNAMIC  
INCOM  
MIC  
ON  
LEVEL  
-
CH-1  
CH-2  
FRONT  
REAR  
AUDIO INPUT  
OFF  
CALL  
OVER  
dB  
OVER  
CH 1  
AUTO OFF DEW  
SERVO RF L i  
RM  
OFF  
DC IN  
/BATT.  
TALLY  
lamp  
40 30  
48k  
20  
10  
0
OPERATE/WARNING  
LIGHT  
MODE  
RM  
VTR  
RESET  
ON  
POWER  
CH 2  
OFF  
I Unavailable functions  
MONITOR  
INCOM  
MIC  
SELECT  
COUNTER  
CTL  
TC  
B  
FILTER  
3200k  
CH-1  
MIX  
CH-2  
CARBON  
DYNAMIC  
ALARM  
1
2
3
32k  
SLAVE  
PB  
NDF  
HOLD  
5600k+1/8ND  
5600k+1/64ND  
I
SHUTTER STATUS  
MENU  
MONITOR  
The following functions are unavailable from the camera  
remote control unit.  
• RM-P200 : AUTO SET  
SP  
WIDE  
AUD LOCK  
MENU  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
AUTO  
FRONT  
REAR  
MANUAL  
AUDIO SELECT  
AUDIO INPUT  
OFF  
CH-1 AUDIO CH-2  
LEVEL  
CALL  
H
M
S
F
AUTO IRIS  
F
U
L
L
A
U
T
O
B
L
A
C
K
LOLUX  
BACK  
NORMAL  
SPOT  
L
STRETCH  
RM  
OFF  
DC IN  
/BATT.  
NORMAL  
COMPRESS  
L
E
BATT  
F
REMAIN  
REV FWD  
POWER  
When the camera remote control unit is connected, the  
viewfinder (VF) FRONTTALLY lamp, REC/ALARM lamp inside  
the viewfinder and the BACK TALLY lamp are displayed as  
shown below.  
H
M
NG  
OPERATE  
NEGA  
ON  
OFF  
• RM-P300 : AUTO SET/BLACK  
NEGA  
ABL  
Remaining tape  
time display  
Remaining battery  
power display  
ALARM  
When an alarm is indicated, the unit operates in the following ways.  
Memo:  
BACK TALLY  
VF  
TALLY  
•
•
•
If the switch functions for this unit and the camera remote  
control unit are the same, the switch function of the  
camera remote control unit will have priority.  
The IRIS AUTO/MANUAL setting will be the camera  
remote control unit switch setting regardless of the lens  
section switch setting.  
When using the camera remote control unit with the local  
remote control unit (RM-LP55/RM-LP57), the local  
remote control unit settings will have priority.ꢀ See page  
93  
Alarm Indicator  
on VCR Display  
Symptom  
VCR Operation and Remedy  
BLINK*  
ON*  
OFF*  
Off  
DEW  
Indicates dew formation (condensation).  
Operation : The VTR rejects operation.  
Remedy : Leave the power on, and wait until  
the indication disappears.  
Preview signals of camera  
remote control unit  
Green  
Green  
light on  
light on  
Red  
SERVO  
(Counter display)  
“SYnc inh”  
Lights in the case of troubles with the drum servo. Operation : During recording the mode becomes  
Lights when the input sync signal is disturbed  
or the unit is subjected to physical shock.  
(Displayed only during recording or during  
playback of unrecorded portions.)  
the stop mode.  
During playback, playback of the  
disturbed video image continues.  
TALLY signals of camera  
remote control unit  
Red  
Red  
light on  
Off  
Off  
Off  
light on light on  
Remedy : • Also check the input sync signal.  
• Signal is disturbed when the unit  
is subject to a violent shock.  
In other cases, please consult the person in  
charge of professional video equipment at your  
nearest JVC-authorized service agent.  
CALL signals of camera  
remote control unit  
Red  
light  
flashing  
Red  
Red  
light flashing light flashing  
CALL signals of this unit  
Red  
Red  
light flashing light flashing  
RF  
Lights in case of video head clogging.  
Operation : Continues.  
(Counter display)  
“HEAd CLoG”  
(Head clogging is detected and indicated during Remedy  
playback and recording check using the RET  
button on the lens section.)  
:
Clean the head with the special head  
cleaning tape.(See“Precautions for Use  
of Head Cleaning Tape” on page 8.)  
Operation : Operation stops.  
* The display method for the BACK TALLY lamp is set in VTR  
Setup menu No. 082 BACK TALLY MODE.  
(Counter display)  
Pc TAPE  
Improper cassette type  
Remedy : Use recordable MiniDV cassette for  
recording video and audio.  
ꢀ See page 74  
(Counter display)  
1394 inh  
• No signal is input to the DV connector.  
Operation : Operation stops.  
Remedy : • Input signals to the DV connector.  
• Copy-guarded signals cannot be  
recorded.  
•
Lamps are off for all other conditions.  
• Copy-guarded signals are input.  
Li  
Lights when the lithium battery for backup of time Operation : Continues.  
code generator and date/time data is exhausted. Remedy : Replace with a new lithium battery.  
See page 36.  
Remaining tape time  
* About 2 minutes before tape end. (The TALLY Operation : Continues.  
lamp and alarm sound are activated only in  
the record mode.)  
REMAIN  
H
M
* When the tape has ended completely.  
Operation : Stops.  
Remaining battery power  
When the remaining battery capacity is low.  
Operation : Continues.  
Remedy : Replace battery pack early.  
E
BATT  
For servicing  
See the service manual page 1-17,  
“1.11 FUNCTION OF INTERNAL SWITCHES”.  
→
When the battery capacity drops to an insufficient Operation : Stops automatically.  
level.  
The camera may generate abnormal signals.  
This is not a malfunction.  
E
BATT  
95  
96  
14. OTHERS  
14. OTHERS  
14-1 Troubleshooting (Cont'd)  
14-1 Troubleshooting (Cont'd)  
Alarm Indications (Cont'd)  
WARNINGS IN VIEWFINDER  
Depending on the alarm conditions, the warning indicators in the LCD display, the WARNING indicator, the TALLY lamp, alarm  
tones and the viewfinder appear as shown in the following table.  
Viewfinder Warning Lamps  
•
VTR WARNING (HEAD):  
Lights in case of video head clogging.  
(Head clogging is detected and indicated during playback  
and recording check using the RET button on the lens  
section.)  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
VTR WARNING (SERVO):  
Lights in the case of drum servo trouble during recording.  
Alarm Indications  
Viewfinder  
WARNING Lamp  
REC Lamp BATT. Lamp  
WARNING  
TALLY  
Lamp  
VTR WARNING (DEW):  
Lights when condensation occurs in the unit.  
REC  
LCD Display  
Alarm Tone  
On Screen Display  
Indicator  
1.  
2.  
BATT  
ALARM  
Battery lamp  
REC/ALARM lamp  
VTR WARNING (STOP):  
Lights in case the unit stops operating.  
"DEW"  
indicator  
VTR WARNING (DEW)  
VTR WARNING (HARD):  
Lights when abnormality occurs in the unit.  
"SERVO"  
indicator  
"SYnc inh"  
indicator  
1. BATTERY lamp  
VTR WARNING (SERVO)  
This red lamp lights under the following circumstance.  
Lights red : • When the battery voltage becomes too low  
for the camera to operate.  
VTR WARNING (REW):  
Lights when abnormality occurs with tape rewind operation.  
"RF"  
indicator  
"HEAd CLoG"  
indicator  
VTR WARNING (HEAD)  
CLOSE CASSETTE COVER:  
Lights when the cassette cover has not been closed.  
2. REC/ALARM lamp  
(Only during the interval from when the VTR trigger  
button is pressed and until recording starts.)  
This lamp lights or blinks green under the following  
conditions.  
REC INHIBIT:  
Indicated when an unrecordable videocassette (the switch  
on the back of the cassette is set to SAVE) is loaded.  
Displayed when copy-guarded IEEE1394 signals are  
inputted.  
Lights Green : • While recording  
Blinks Green : • During the interval where the unit  
switches from record-pause to record  
mode.  
"Li"  
indicator  
Remaining  
tape time  
TAPE NEAR END  
About 2 min. before tape end.  
TAPE END  
• Immediately before the tape runs out or  
has run out.  
• If the unit malfunctions.  
•
NO TAPE:  
REMAIN  
H
M
Lights when the VTR trigger button is pressed with no  
videocassette loaded.  
(In record mode only)  
Ⅲ Character display warnings:  
Ⅲ Warnings on the White Balance Function  
TAPE NEAR END: Less than 3 minutes tape remaining.  
Remaining  
battery power  
TAPE END  
: The tape has run out.  
E
BATT  
The voltage display of status  
screen 1 will flash.  
(Except for play  
/search mode)  
Ⅲ Function Failures  
V TR WARN I NG ( HEAD )  
Status 0 or  
Status 1 mode  
When an abnormality occurs in the unit or an improper operation  
is performed, one of the following warning messages will appear  
in the viewfinder.  
E
BATT  
The voltage display of status  
screen 1 will flash.  
•
AUTO WHITE A, B  
NG: OBJECT  
Improper object.  
•
Check whether the object being  
shot is white enough.  
•
Check that selected filter suits the  
illumination conditions.  
•
•
AUTO WHITE A, B  
Amount of incident light insufficient.  
ERROR: LOW LIGHT  
•
Check to see if it is necessary to  
increase illumination or perform  
iris adjustment.  
AUTO WHITE A, B  
Amount of incident light excessive.  
ERROR: OVER LIGHT  
•
Check to see if illumination and iris  
adjustment are appropriate.  
Viewfinder  
On Screen  
Display  
VTR WARNING (SERVO)  
AUTO WH I T E  
NG : OB J ECT  
A
REC  
BATT  
ALARM  
BATT lamp  
REC lamp  
97  
98  
14. OTHERS  
14. OTHERS  
14-1 Troubleshooting (Cont'd)  
14-1 Troubleshooting (Cont'd)  
In the case of troubles occurring during operation of the GY-DV550, it performs a self-test to identify the cause and displays the  
result in the form of an error code.The error code consists of the "main code" which indicates its contents and the "sub-code" which  
indicates the details. Depending on the status of the GY-DV550 at this time, indications may also appear on the LCD display, the  
WARNING indicator may activate and the alarm tone may be generated.  
In the viewfinder, the "VTRWARNING (DEW)" indication appears when condensation is detected, and the "VTRWARNING (STOP)",  
"VTR WARNING (HARD)" or "VTR WARNING (REW)" indication appears depending on the contents of the error code when some  
of the other error codes are displayed.  
TROUBLES WITH ERROR CODE OUTPUTS  
Error Code  
3200  
Error Details  
GY-DV550 Operation  
Remedy  
Switch the power OFF and then  
switch it back ON. However, the tape  
may be damaged depending on the  
situation. Please consult the person  
in charge of professional video  
equipment at your nearest JVC-  
authorized service agent.  
Tape loading impossible.  
Operation stops. All operations  
are rejected.  
3300  
4100  
Tape unloading impossible.  
Irregular eject operation.  
Operation stops. All operations  
are rejected.  
WARNING indicator  
Operation stops. All operations  
are rejected.  
TALLY lamp  
VTR WARNING (HARD)  
VTR WARNING (DEW)  
TALLY  
lamp  
4200  
5605  
Cassette housing abnormality.  
Tape is cut.  
Operation stops. All operations  
are rejected.  
OPERATE/WARNING  
LIGHT  
ON  
OFF  
MODE  
RM  
VTR  
RESET  
MONITOR  
INCOM  
MIC  
SELECT  
COUNTER  
CTL  
TC  
UB  
FILTER  
3200k  
5600k+1/8ND  
5600k+1/64ND  
CH-1  
CARBON  
DYNAMIC  
ALARM  
MIX  
CH-2  
1
2
3
INCOM  
MIC  
ON  
LEVEL  
SHUTTER STATUS  
MENU  
MONITOR  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
AUTO  
FRONT  
REAR  
MANUAL  
AUDIO SELECT  
AUDIO INPUT  
OFF  
Operation stops. All operations Open the cassette cover by using the  
are rejected.  
CH-1 AUDIO CH-2  
LEVEL  
CALL  
AUTO IRIS  
F
U
L
L
A
U
T
O
B
L
A
C
K
LOLUX  
BACK  
NORMAL  
SPOT  
L
STRETCH  
RM  
OFF  
DC IN  
/BATT.  
NORMAL  
COMPRESS  
L
EJECT switch and then switch the  
power ON again.  
POWER  
NG  
OPERATE  
ON  
OFF  
EARPHONE  
Switch the power OFF and then  
switch it back ON. However, the tape  
may be damaged depending on the  
situation. Please consult the person  
in charge of professional video  
equipment at your nearest JVC-  
authorized service agent.  
5606 to 5607  
5702  
Tape is slack.  
Operation stops. All operations  
are rejected.  
Tape end sensor error.  
Tape beginning sensor error.  
Drum rotation stopped.  
Operation stops. All operations  
are rejected.  
ALARM  
tone  
Auto-OFF indicator:  
Dew condensation  
indicator  
5802  
Operation stops. All operations  
are rejected.  
Lights depending on the error  
code. When this indicator  
lights, the GY-DV550 will  
automatically stop operation or  
eject the cassette.  
7001  
Operation stops. All operations  
are rejected.  
AUTO OFF  
DEW  
The GY-DV550 does not accept  
any operation.  
7101  
Capstan rotation stopped.  
Supply reel rotation error.  
Operation stops. All operations  
are rejected.  
7202 to 7203  
Operation stops. All operations  
are rejected.  
Main code  
Sub-code  
7302 to 7303  
7305  
Take up reel rotation error.  
Operation stops. All operations  
are rejected.  
Irregular tape winding when Operation stops. All operations  
unloading. are rejected.  
WARNING indicator Alarm Tone  
Display  
GY-DV550 Operation  
Red, blinking  
Continuous "Error code"  
• Automatically ejects the cassette. It can be inserted again.  
"Error code"  
plus  
• Automatically stops operation or ejects the cassette.  
(Auto OFF) * The GY-DV550 does not accept any operation.  
"AUTO OFF"  
Red, blinking  
Intermittent  
"DEW "  
• Dew condensation inside the unit.  
The GY-DV550 does not accept any operation until the DEW indicator  
disappears from the display.  
* In the Auto OFF status, it is impossible to operate the GY-  
DV550. This condition can be cancelled by switching the  
OPERATE switch OFF and then switching it ON again. If the  
same problem occurs again after the power is turned ON,  
there may be something wrong with the GY-DV550. Please  
consult the person in charge of professional video equipment  
at your nearest JVC-authorized service agent.  
The GY-DV550 is a microcomputer-controlled piece of  
equipment, which may malfunction due to external noise  
or interference. In this case, set the OPERATE switch to  
OFF, remove the lithium backup battery, and then set the  
OPERATE switch to ON again after a few minutes.  
* If the display operates abnormally, Press the RESET switch  
inside the lithium battery case, and then set the OPERATE  
switch to ON again. (ꢀ See page 36)  
Please note that pressing the RESET switch will also reset  
the time code data and time and date data.  
For servicing  
See the service manual page 1-29,  
“1.19 WARNING CODES”.  
←
99  
100  
For servicing  
See the service manual page 1-25,  
“1.14.4 HOUR METER”.  
←
14. OTHERS  
14. OTHERS  
14-1 Troubleshooting (Cont'd)  
14-2 Hour Meter Display  
The unit can display the accumulated running time of the head drum as hour meter data on the counter display.The hour meter can  
be displayed by selecting HM (HOUR METER) on the VCR Setup Menu. Use this as a guide for periodical maintenance.  
ꢀ See page 8.  
TROUBLES WITHOUT ERROR CODE OUTPUTS  
Remedy  
Symptoms  
Note:  
• Is power supply connected properly?  
• Is battery pack recharged?  
Power cannot be switched ON.  
The hour meter is not shown correctly when no  
videocassette is inserted.  
• When the lithium battery is depleted, it may not be possible to turn on the power.  
• Was the power turned ON immediately after being turned OFF?  
Wait at least 5 seconds before turning the power ON again once it has been turned  
OFF.  
OPERATE/WARNING  
LIGHT  
MODE  
RM  
VTR  
RESET  
ON  
OFF  
MONITOR  
INCOM  
MIC  
SELECT  
COUNTER  
CTL  
TC  
UB  
FILTER  
3200k  
5600k+1/8ND  
5600k+1/64ND  
CH-1  
AUDIO  
LEVEL  
CARBON  
DYNAMIC  
ALARM  
MIX  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
1
2
3
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
INCOM  
AUTO  
FRONT  
REAR  
MIC  
ON  
LEVEL  
SHUTTER STATUS  
MENU  
MONITOR  
• Check whether theVCR Setup Menu item No. 050 REMOTE SELECT has been set  
to "IEEE1394" or "RS232C". If so, change the setting to "LOCAL".  
• Is the cassette cover open?  
MANUAL  
Operation buttons on the GY-DV550 don't  
work.  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
AUTO  
FRONT  
REAR  
AUDIO SELECT  
VTR SELECT TC GENE.  
AUDIO INPUT  
MANUAL  
AUDIO SELECT  
AUDIO INPUT  
OFF  
AUO  
LEL  
CH-1  
CH-2  
SEE  
CONTINUE  
REC  
FREE  
MENU  
A
INSTR-  
UCTION  
MANUAL  
INT  
AUTO IRIS  
F
U
L
L
A
U
T
O
B
L
A
C
K
LOLUX  
2. 5.  
PRST  
REGEN  
PARA  
EXT  
BACK  
NORMAL  
SPOT  
L
STRETCH  
RM  
OFF  
DC IN  
/BATT.  
NORMAL  
COMPRESS  
L
LITHIUM BATT.  
GROUP  
HOLD  
ITEM  
SHIFT  
SELECT DATA SET  
ADVANCE PRESET  
MENU button  
CAM AUX  
POWER  
The GY-DV550 remains inoperative as long as the cassette door is open.  
NG  
OPERATE  
5. DATA SET button  
ON  
OFF  
VTR INPUT  
• Is switch on cassette set to REC? If it is set to SAVE, set it to REC.  
Recording is not possible.  
3. GROUP button  
1. POWER switch  
4. SELECT button  
• Video head may be clogged with dirt. Clean head with the special head cleaning  
tape. (See "Precautions for Use of Head Cleaning Tape" on page 8.)  
Noise interferes with playback video.  
Counter display  
Viewfinder  
• Is the sync signal input to the GENLOCK IN connector disturbed? If so, check and  
remedy the input sync signal.  
Sound and picture are disturbed during  
playback.  
1. Set the POWER switch to ON.  
2. Press the MENU button to display the VCR Setup Menu.  
"MENU" lights in the display, and the VCR Setup Menu's  
group menu appears in the viewfinder and on the counter  
display.  
• Time code data is not shown as on-screen-display during recording or playback.  
The data is shown only on the counter display.  
Time code data is not shown as on-  
screen-display.  
Accumulated drum running time: 200 hrs.  
( HOUR METER )  
• Is the COUNTER switch set to "CTL"?  
If so, set the switch to "TC" or "UB".  
Time code and user's bit data are not  
shown on the counter display.  
DH : DRUM HOUR METER  
00 02 00H  
3. Press the GROUP button and choose "HM:HOUR METER".  
•
"HM HOUR METER" is shown blinking in the viewfinder.  
The counter display shows "Hour".  
• The VCR Setup Menu item No. 396 BATTERY TYPE may not be set correctly in  
accordance with the type of battery in use. If the menu item setting is incorrect, set  
it correctly using the VCR setup menu item BATTERY TYPE.  
• Is the battery old?  
Remaining battery power display is  
incorrect.  
Battery alarm is displayed and the GY-  
DV550 enters the non-operating mode  
even when a fully charged battery is used.  
4. Press the SELECT button.  
The accumulated running time of the head drum is indicated  
in the viewfinder and on the counter display.  
• The capacity of the power supply may be insufficient. Check the power voltage.  
Cassette cannot be ejected after the  
power is turned ON.  
5.To return to the normal mode, press the DATA SET button.  
•
Pressing the MENU button returns you to the group menu.  
• Adjust the viewfinder's contrast and bright controls.  
• Is the filter turret set to 5600K+ND?  
• Is the iris closed?  
Viewfinder image looks dark or unclear.  
• Is the shutter speed too fast?  
• Is the viewfinder cable correctly connected?  
• When a tape recorded on another unit is played back or used for recording, this  
phenomenon may occur due to tracking errors.  
Noise appears when playing back a tape  
recorded on another unit.  
The transient section between scenes  
recorded on other units and those  
recorded on this unit may appear  
disturbed.  
The front section's recording level control • Is the VCR Setup Menu item No. 246 CH1 FRONT VR ENABLE set to "DISABLE".  
doesn't work.  
If so, set to "ENABLE".  
• The front section's recording level control cannot be used to change the recording  
level of the sound input to CH2. Use the side section's CH2 recording level control  
for this purpose.  
The front section's recording level control  
doesn't change the recording level of the  
sound input to CH2.  
• Is the SERVO indicator or “SYNC INH” displayed on the counter display?  
Recording operation stopped.  
If so, check the input sync signal.  
101  
102  
U
E
14. OTHERS  
14. OTHERS  
14-3 Specifications  
14-3 Specifications  
Ⅲ CAMERA SECTION  
Ⅲ INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS  
Ⅲ CAMERA SECTION  
Ⅲ INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS  
Image pickup devices: 1/2-inch interline CCD x 3  
Color separation optical system:  
F1.4 3-color separation prism  
Number of effective pixels:  
Approx. 380,000 pixels ((H) 768 x  
(V) 494)  
Video signal output : 1 V (p-p), 75 ohms (BNC)  
Image pickup devices: 1/2-inch interline CCD x 3  
Colour separation optical system:  
F1.4 3-colour separation prism  
Number of effective pixels:  
Approx. 440,000 pixels ((H) 752 x  
(V) 582)  
Video signal output : 1 V (p-p), 75 ohms (BNC)  
unbalanced composite output.  
unbalanced composite output.  
YC output  
: Y 1 V (p-p) 75 ohms unbalance  
C 0.286 V (p-p) 75 ohms  
unbalance (4-pin)  
YC output  
: Y 1 V (p-p) 75 ohms unbalance  
C 0.3 V (p-p) 75 ohms unbalance  
(4-pin)  
PROMPTER output : Return/prompter video signal  
output  
External video signal : Composite video signals  
PROMPTER output : Return/prompter video signal  
output  
External video signal : Composite video signals  
Color system  
Color bars  
: NTSC (R-Y, B-Y encoder)  
: SMPTE color bar  
Colour system  
Colour bars  
: PAL (R-Y, B-Y encoder)  
: EBU colour bar  
Sync system  
: Internal sync (built-in SSG)  
External sync (VBS or BB)  
: Bayonet system  
(compatible with 1/2-inch lenses)  
: 3200 K, 5600K + 1/8ND, 5600 K +  
1/64ND  
input  
1 V (p-p) 0.3 V (p-p) 75 ohms  
unbalance (BNC)  
Bandwidth 6.75 MHz  
: Camera composite video signal  
output  
Sync system  
: Internal sync (built-in SSG)  
External sync (VBS or BB)  
: Bayonet system  
(compatible with 1/2-inch lenses)  
: 3200 K, 5600K + 1/8ND, 5600 K +  
1/64ND  
input  
1 V (p-p) 0.3 V (p-p) 75 ohms  
unbalance (BNC)  
Bandwidth 6.75 MHz  
: Camera composite video signal  
output  
Lens mount  
Optical filter  
Sensitivity  
Lens mount  
Optical filter  
Sensitivity  
VTR/RM multi-pin  
connector  
VCR/RM multi-pin  
connector  
(Y/C/RGB/CPN can be selected  
in menu) (26-pin)  
(Y/C / RGB / CPN Can be  
selected in menu)  
: F11, 2000 lx  
: F11, 2000 lx  
Minimum illumination: 0.75 lx (F1.4, LOLUX mode)  
Calculated value  
S/N (VIDEO OUT output) : 62 dB (Typical)  
Horizontal resolution : 750 lines (Center)  
Lens  
Audio input  
: 12-pin connector  
Minimum illumination: 0.75 lx (F1.4, LOLUX mode)  
Calculated value  
S/N (VIDEO OUT output) : 60 dB (Typical)  
Horizontal resolution : 750 lines (Center)  
(26-pin)  
: 12-pin connector  
: Microphone  
: Microphone  
Line  
-60dBs, 3 kohm  
balanced  
+4dBs, 10 kohm  
balanced  
Lens  
Audio input  
-60dBs, 3 kohm  
balanced  
+4dBs, 10 kohm  
balanced  
Gain  
:
-3, 0, 3, 6, 9, 12, 18 dB, ALC, LOLUX,  
Gain  
:
-3, 0, 3, 6, 9, 12, 18 dB, ALC, LOLUX,  
Line  
Shutter speed  
V.SCAN speed  
Registration  
: 1/100, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000  
: 60.1 Hz to 2084.6 Hz  
: 0.05% or less (excluding lens  
distortion)  
Audio output  
Earphone output  
: -6 dBs, low impedance, unbalanced  
: -60 dBs to -17 dBs, at 8-ohm load  
Monaural audio (mini jack)  
Shutter speed  
V.SCAN speed  
Hz  
: 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000  
: 50.1 Hz to 2067.8  
Audio output  
Earphone output  
: -6 dBs, low impedance, unbalanced  
: -60 dBs to -17 dBs, at 8-ohm load  
Monaural audio (mini jack)  
DC input  
: 12V DC (11V to 15 V DC) (XLR-4)  
Registration  
: 0.05% or less (excluding lens  
distortion)  
Contour correction : Horizontal:dual-edged.Vertical:2 H  
Auxiliary power output: 12 V DC, max. 0.1A (11V to 15 V  
DC input  
: 12V DC (11V to 15 V DC) (XLR-4)  
DC)  
Contour correction : Horizontal:dual-edged.Vertical:2 H  
Auxiliary power output: 12 V DC, max. 0.1A (11V to 15 V  
DV connector  
RS-232C  
: 4-pin  
: Mini DIN 6-pin  
DC)  
: 4-pin  
: Mini DIN 6-pin  
Ⅲ VCR SECTION  
DV connector  
RS-232C  
Ⅲ VCR SECTION  
Format  
Tape speed  
Record/Play time  
: Mini DV (SP mode only)  
: 18.812 mm/s  
: 60 minutes  
(With M-DV60ME cassette)  
: Approx. 3 minutes 30 seconds  
(With M-DV60ME cassette)  
Format  
Tape speed  
Record/Play time  
: Mini DV (SP mode only)  
: 18.831 mm/s  
: 60 minutes  
(With M-DV60ME cassette)  
: Approx. 3 minutes 30 seconds  
(With M-DV60ME cassette)  
Ⅲ GENERAL  
Ⅲ GENERAL  
Power consumption : 34 W (when recording)  
Mass : Approx. 4 kg  
Operating temperatures : 0 °C to 40 °C  
Operating humidity : 30 % to 80 % RH  
Storage temperatures: -20 °C to 60 °C  
F.F/Rewind time  
Power consumption : 12V  
recording)  
: Approx. 4 kg  
Operating temperatures : 0 °C to 40 °C  
Operating humidity : 30 % to 80 % RH  
Storage temperatures: -20 °C to 60 °C  
2.8A with VF-P400 (when  
F.F/Rewind time  
Mass  
[VIDEO]  
Recording format  
: 8-bit, 13.5 MHz, 4:1:1 component  
recording  
[VIDEO]  
Recording format  
: 8-bit, 13.5 MHz, 4:2:0 component  
recording  
Ⅲ ACCESSORIES  
Microphone  
Tripod base  
Lithium battery  
Head cleaning tape  
Instructions  
: x 1  
: x 1  
: x 1 (CR2032)  
: x 1  
: x 1  
[AUDIO]  
Recording format  
Ⅲ ACCESSORIES  
: 16-bit, 48 kHz, 2-channel PCM  
audio/12-bit, 32 kHz 4-channel  
PCM audio (2 channels only for  
recording)  
[AUDIO]  
Recording format  
Microphone  
Tripod base  
Lithium battery  
Head cleaning tape  
Instructions  
: x 1  
: x 1  
: x 1 (CR2032)  
: x 1  
: x 1  
: 16-bit, 48 kHz, 4-channel PCM  
audio/12-bit, 32 kHz 4-channel  
PCM audio (2 channels only for  
recording)  
Frequency response : 20 Hz to 20 kHz  
Wow & flutter  
: Below measurable limit  
Frequency response : 20 Hz to 20 kHz  
Wow & flutter  
: Below measurable limit  
[Time Code System]  
Time code signal  
LTC input  
: Compliance with SMPTE standard  
: 0 dBs 6 dBs, high impedance,  
unbalanced  
: 0 dBs 6 dBs, low impedance,  
unbalanced  
[Time Code System]  
Time code signal  
LTC input  
: Compliance with EBU standard  
: 0 dBs 6 dBs, high impedance,  
unbalanced  
: 0 dBs 6 dBs, low impedance,  
unbalanced  
Design and specifications are subject to change without  
notice.  
Design and specifications are subject to change without  
notice.  
LTC output  
LTC output  
103U  
E-103  
14. OTHERS  
14-3 Specifications  
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES  
Viewfinder  
Power zoom lens  
: VF-P115B, VF-P116  
: S14 x 7.3B12, S16 x 6.7B12  
S19 x 6.5B12 (FUJINON)  
YH14 x 7.3K12, YH18 x 6.7K12 (CANON)  
: AA-P250  
AC power adapter  
Microphone  
: MV-P615  
Microphone holder  
: KA-A50  
EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS (unit: mm)  
PUSH OPEN  
OPERATE/WARNING  
LIGHT  
ON  
OFF  
MODE  
RM  
VTR  
RESET  
MONITOR  
VF  
INCOM  
MIC  
SELECT  
COUNTER  
CTL  
TC  
UB  
FILTER  
3200k  
5600k+1/8ND  
5600k+1/64ND  
CH-1  
MIX  
CH-2  
CARBON  
DYNAMIC  
ALARM  
1
2
3
INCOM  
MIC  
ON  
LEVEL  
SHUTTER STATUS  
MENU  
MONITOR  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
AUTO  
FRONT  
REAR  
MANUAL  
AUDIO SELECT  
AUDIO INPUT  
OFF  
AUDIO  
LEVEL  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CALL  
AUTO IRIS  
FULL AUTO BLACK  
LOLUX  
BACK  
NORMAL  
SPOT  
L
STRETCH  
RM  
OFF  
DC IN  
/BATT.  
NORMAL  
COMPRESS  
L
POWER  
OFF ZEBRA  
SKIN  
AREA  
NG  
OPERATE  
AUTO  
WHITE  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
ACCU  
FOCUS  
VTR  
AUDIO  
TAKE  
LEVEL CH-1  
140  
376  
* Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.  
VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED  
® is a registered trademark owned by VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LTD.  
® is a registered trademark in Japan, the U.S.A., the U.K. and many other countries.  
© 2000 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED  
Printed in Japan  
SC96999 (U MODEL)  
SC961000 (E MODEL)  
104  

Rockford Fosgate FNX 1404 User Manual
RCA EZ3000PLR User Manual
Pyramid Car Audio Car Amplifier PB 1500 User Manual
Philips BDP5510 User Manual
Panasonic P2HD VQT1H84 User Manual
Panasonic Blu ray Player DMPBDT230 User Manual
Nikon Micro Nikkor 105mm f User Manual
Nikon Coolpix L24 User Manual
Melissa 246 011 User Manual
Lochinvar SOLUTION CB 215 User Manual